CANON XEED WX520 - Video projector

XEED WX520 - Video projector CANON - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free XEED WX520 CANON in PDF.

📄 314 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question 10 questions ⚙️ Specs
Notice CANON XEED WX520 - page 1
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.
Product Type Video Projector
Brand Canon
Model XEED WX520
Display Technology LCOS (Liquid Crystal on Silicon)
Resolution WXGA (1280 x 800)
Brightness 5200 Lumens
Contrast Ratio 2000:1
Lamp Type NSHA (High Pressure Mercury)
Lamp Life (Normal Mode) 3000 hours
Lens Motorized zoom and focus
Zoom Ratio 1.7x
Keystone Correction Vertical: ±30°, Horizontal: ±10°
Connectivity HDMI, DVI, VGA, Composite, S-Video, USB, RS-232C
Dimensions (W x H x D) 337 x 136 x 360 mm
Weight 7.5 kg
Power Consumption 430 W (max)
Noise Level (Normal Mode) 35 dB
Included Accessories Power cable, remote control, batteries, lens cap, user manual
Cleaning Clean air filter regularly; use soft cloth for lens
Safety Auto power-off, overheat protection
Repairability Lamp replaceable; filter accessible for cleaning
Spare Parts Availability Lamp unit, remote control, filter kit available
General Information Designed for professional use, compatible with various sources

Frequently Asked Questions - XEED WX520 CANON

How do I replace the lamp in the Canon XEED WX520?
To replace the lamp, turn off the projector and unplug it. Wait for the lamp to cool. Remove the lamp cover on the side, unscrew the old lamp module, and install the new one. Ensure the lamp is securely seated. Reset the lamp timer via the menu. Use only genuine Canon lamp model LV-LP37.
How often should I clean the air filter?
Clean the air filter every 100 hours of operation or when the filter warning indicator appears. Turn off the projector, unplug it, and remove the filter. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust, or wash with water and dry completely. Replace the filter if damaged.
What is the throw ratio of the Canon XEED WX520?
The throw ratio is 1.35:1 to 2.28:1 with the standard lens. This means for a 100-inch diagonal screen, the projector should be placed approximately 2.7 to 4.6 meters away.
Can I connect a laptop to the XEED WX520?
Yes, the projector has multiple inputs: connect via HDMI or VGA for video, and USB or RS-232C for control. Use the appropriate cable and select the input source from the menu.
Does the XEED WX520 support 3D content?
No, the Canon XEED WX520 does not support 3D projection. It is a standard 2D projector with WXGA resolution.
How do I adjust the keystone correction?
Press the 'Keystone' button on the remote control or navigate to the menu under 'Display' > 'Keystone'. Use the arrow keys to adjust vertical and horizontal keystone correction. The projection can also be adjusted using the lens shift function.
What is the maximum image size?
The maximum image size is up to 300 inches diagonal, depending on the projection distance and ambient light conditions. For best brightness, use a screen size between 80 and 150 inches.
How can I reset the lamp timer?
After replacing the lamp, go to the menu: 'Settings' > 'Lamp Timer' > 'Reset'. Confirm the reset. This will clear the lamp usage hours and allow accurate tracking.
The projector turns off unexpectedly. What could be wrong?
Possible causes include overheating, lamp failure, or power interruption. Check if the air filter is clogged, ensure ventilation is not blocked, and verify the lamp is not at end of life. If the problem persists, consult a service center.
Where can I download the user manual for the Canon XEED WX520?
The user manual is available for free on notice-facile.com and the Canon support website. You can download the PDF version in multiple languages. It covers installation, operation, maintenance, and troubleshooting.

User questions about XEED WX520 CANON

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

The email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone responds to your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your Video projector in PDF format for free! Find your manual XEED WX520 - CANON and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. XEED WX520 by CANON.

USER MANUAL XEED WX520 CANON

MULTIMEDIA PROJECTOR

WUX450

WX520

WUX400ST

WX450ST

User's Manual

CANON XEED WX520 - User's Manual - 1

natural_image Exterior view of a white and black Canon projector (no visible text or symbols)

CANON XEED WX520 - User's Manual - 2

natural_image White Canon projector with black ventilation grille and camera lens (no visible text or symbols)

CANON XEED WX520 - User's Manual - 3

AISYS

Aspectual Illumination System

HDMI ^TM

HIGH DEFINITION MULTIMEDIA INTERFACE

PJLink™

Table of Contents

Safety Instructions

Before Use

Operation

Projecting an Image

Useful Functions Available During a Presentation

Setting Functions from Menus

Installation and Maintenance

Installation

Connecting to a Network

Maintenance

Networked Multi-Projection

Networked Multi-Projection Overview

Operation in Each Mode

Functions in All Modes

Appendix

Other Information

Index

ENG

How to Use This Manual

Thank you for purchasing a Canon projector.

The WUX450/WX520/WUX400ST/WX450ST Multimedia Projector (hereinafter referred to as “the projector”) is a high-performance projector that is capable of projecting a high-resolution computer screen and high-quality digital image on a large screen.

This Manual

This manual combines the user's manual for WUX450/WX520/WUX400ST/WX450ST Multimedia Projectors. The "Operation" section (P49) describes how to use the projector. The "Installation and Maintenance" section (P123) describes initial setup and regular maintenance. For instructions on software for projection by multiple projectors linked in a local network, refer to the "Networked Multi-Projection (NMPJ)" section (P205). Read this manual thoroughly to make the most of your projector. Installation of the projector should be performed by a qualified technician, if possible. Contact the Canon Customer Support Center for further information. Unless otherwise noted, figures in this manual show the WUX450/WX520.

Symbols of Button Operations

The projector can be operated using the buttons on the remote control or on the side of the projector. The remote control allows you to operate all functions of the projector.

In this document, the button's operations are shown as below.

Operation of buttons on side of projector Remote control button operation Selecting Screen Aspect Select the correct aspect ratio for the screen which is used. 1Press the MENU button to display the menu window. Remote control projector 2Press the []/4] buttons to select the [Install settings] tab. Remote control projector Indicate the buttons to be pressed

Symbols Used in This Manual

Meanings of the symbols used in this manual are as follows.

CANON XEED WX520 - Symbols Used in This Manual - 1

A precaution about operation or restriction is given here.

CANON XEED WX520 - Symbols Used in This Manual - 2

Indicates supplemental information to note in use.

Please note that enlarging or reducing the size of an image for commercial purposes or public presentation may infringe on the legally protected copyright or the copyright holder of the original material.

About Trademarks

  • Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
  • Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8 and Aero are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and / or other countries.
    • Mac, Mac OS and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and / or other countries.
  • HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
  • PJLink is a registered trademark, or an application has been submitted for trademark, in Japan, the United States and / or other countries or regions.
  • AMX is a trademark of AMX Corporation.
  • Crestron®, Crestron RoomView®, and Crestron Connected™ are registered trademarks of Crestron Electronics, Inc.

Projector Highlights

Minimal Space Needed for Installation

Compact body (337 x 134 x 370 mm / 13.3 x 5.3 x 14.6 in (W x H x D) (WUX450/WX520) or 337 x 134 x 415 mm / 13.3 x 5.3 x 16.3 in (W x H x D) (WUX400ST/WX450ST)) can be installed with minimal space requirements. (P298)

High-Resolution LCOS Projection

Projection at 1920x1200 (WUXGA) for the WUX450/WUX400ST or 1440x900 (WXGA+) for the WX520/WX450ST, thanks to high-resolution reflective liquid crystal (LCOS) panels.

Split-Screen Display

Side-by-side projection of two input images from devices connected to the projector. (P81)

Manual Lens Shift, Zoom, and Focus

Manually adjust image position (P58, P134) and focus (P59) as needed.

Zoom Adjustment to Match Screen Size

The size of the projected image can be adjusted using optical zoom (P57) on the WUX450/WX520 and electronic zoom (P149) on the WUX400ST/WX450ST.

Close-Range Projection on Large Screens (WUX400ST/WX450ST)

Close-range projection on wide screens is supported, such as projection on 100-inch screens from about 1.2 meters.

USB File Viewer

Project JPEG images stored on a USB flash. (P79)

Edge Blending

Blend the overlapping edges of images from multiple projectors to make the overall image more seamless. (P159)

Displaying Test Pattern

Project a range of test patterns, with no image input needed. (P158)

Networked Multi-Projection (NMPJ)

Project images from multiple computers via a network connection. (P205)

Quick Reference Guide

This Quick Reference Guide will help you find functions that make full use of the projector and are useful for producing an attractive presentation, etc.

Connecting the Projector

Connecting to the Computer (P137 - P139)

Connecting to AV Equipment (P140 - P142)

Projecting an Image

Starting Projection (P52)

Selecting an Input Signal (P53 - P54)

Projecting Images from Two Sources at Once (P81)

Adjusting the Image

Adjusting the Image Size and Focus (P57 - P59)

Adjusting Keystone Distortion (P68)

Adjusting Aspect Ratio (P60 - P67)

Eliminating Flickers from Computer Screen and Adjusting Positional Shift (P89, P90)

Adjusting Colors and Image Quality

Projecting an Image on a Greenboard (P153)

Selecting an Image Mode Suitable for the Projecting Image (P97)

Making Fine Color Adjustments (P101)

Removing Noise (P103)

Producing a Presentation

Temporarily Blacking Out an Image (P76)

Freezing the Picture (P76)

Adjusting the Volume (P77)

Muting the Sound (P77)

Zooming an Image (P78)

Projecting Images on a USB Flash Drive (P79 - P80)

Changing the Remote Control Channel (P114)

Resetting Projector Setting

Canceling the Password (P117)

Initializing the Network Setting (P175)

Restoring Default Menu Settings (P121)

Miscellaneous Functions

Using Auto Power-Off (P110)

Turning on the Projector by Connecting the Power Cord (P111)

Disabling the Beep During Operation (P111)

Disabling Buttons (P112)

Hiding Guide Messages (P154)

Setting a Password (P116)

Reducing the Lamp Brightness (P107)

Displaying Test Pattern (P158)

Selecting Audio In Terminal (P153)

Combining Images from Multiple

Projectors (P159 - P165)

Supplying Images over a Network (P208)

Table of Contents

How to Use This Manual....2

Projector Highlights......4

Quick Reference Guide .... 5

Safety Instructions.... 16

Safety Precautions....17

CAUTION ON HANGING FROM THE CEILING ....17

■ READ AND KEEP THIS OWNER'S MANUAL FOR LATER USE. 18

AC Power Cord Requirement....20

Federal Communication Commission Notice....21

Precautions for Use 23

Installation and Handling Precautions....24

Precautions on the Lamp 25

Precautions for the Batteries of the Remote Control 26

For Safe Use....28

Before Use....31

Supplied Accessories.... 32

■ Attaching the Lens Cap....33

Preparing the Remote Control.... 34

■ Installing Remote Control Batteries....34

■ Remote Control Operating Range....35

■ Using an Optional Wired Remote (RS-RC05)....36

Part Names 37

Projector (WUX450/WX520)....37

■ Front Side....37

■ Rear Side 37

■ Bottom Side....37

Projector (WUX400ST/WX450ST)....38

■ Front Side....38

■ Rear Side 38

■ Bottom Side....38

Remote control....40

Side Control....42

LED indicators....42

■ LED Indicator Displays....43

Input Terminal 44

Lens Shift Control....45

Projection Lens 45

Open Source Software 46

■ Software under the GPL and LGPL 46
■ Software under the GNU General Public License Version 2....46

Operation....49

Projecting an Image....51

Step 1 Turn the Projector On....52

Step 2 Select an Input Signal....53

Types of Input Signals....53

Selecting an Input Signal 54

Step 3 Adjust the Image .... 55

Setting the Display Resolution of the Computer ....55

■ Windows 8....55
■ Windows 7....55
■ Windows Vista....56
■ Windows XP....56
■ Mac OS X....56

Auto PC Adjustment 57

■ Performing the Auto PC Function ....57

Adjusting the Image Size (WUX450/WX520)....57

Adjusting the Image Position....58

■ WUX450/WX520 58
■ WUX400ST/WX450ST 58

Adjusting the Focus....59

Step 4 Select an Aspect Ratio (Screen Aspect) Matching the Screen....60

Selecting Screen Aspect 60

Moving Image with 16:9 D. Image Shift....63

Moving Image with 4:3 D. Image Shift....64

Resetting the Image Shift 65

Selecting the Aspect....66

Types of Aspect Ratios 66

Selecting an Aspect Ratio 67

Step 5 Correct the Image Distortion....68

Adjusting Keystone Distortion 68

■ Horizontal/Vertical Keystone Correction 68
■ Corner Adjustment....69
■ Resetting the Keystone Adjustment....70

Table of Contents

Step 6 Select the Image Quality (Image Mode) ...... 71

Image Modes ....71

■ Selecting an Image Mode ....72

Step 7 Set Power-Saving Settings....73

Step 8 Turn the Projector Off....74

Useful Functions Available During a Presentation .....75

Useful Presentation Functions....76

Temporarily Blacking Out an Image....76

Freezing the Picture....76

Adjusting the Volume 77

Muting the Sound....77

Zooming an Image 78

Projecting Images on a USB Flash Drive....79

Split-Screen Display 81

Setting Functions from Menus 83

Using Menus....84

Menu Configuration 84

Basic Menu Operations 85

Setting Display Status (Input Settings)......87

Selecting the Aspect....87

Setup Using Auto PC 88

Selecting an Input Signal 88

Adjusting the Input Signal (Total dots) 89

Adjusting the Input Signal (Tracking) 89

Adjusting the Input Signal (Horizontal position)....90

Adjusting the Input Signal (Vertical Position) 90

Adjusting the Input Signal (Horizontal pixels)......91

Adjusting the Input Signal (Vertical pixels) 91

Adjusting HDMI Input Level 92

Setting the HDMI Color Format....92

Specifying HDMI Overscan 93

Specifying Progressive Processing 93

Specifying the Slideshow Interval 94

Specifying Split-Screen Display 95

Adjusting Image Quality (Image Adjustment) 96

Specifying Image Priority in Split-Screen Mode 96

Specifying the Image Mode....97

Creating/Saving a User Profile....98

Adjusting Brightness....99

Adjusting Contrast....99

Adjusting Sharpness ....100

Correcting Gamma....100

Adjusting Colors 101

Adjusting to the Ambient Light (Ambient Light)....102

Reducing Image Noise (Noise reduction) 103

Dynamic Gamma Adjustment ....103

Correcting Memory Color....104

Fine-Tuning Colors (6-axis Color Adjustment) 104

Fine-Tuning Gamma 105

Controlling Contrast (Iris) 106

Specifying the Lamp Mode....107

Resetting Image Adjustment Settings 107

Customizing System Operation (System Settings) 108

Registering User Logos....108

Positioning User Logos....108

No Signal Screen....109

Screen When Blank....109

Selecting a Logo at Startup....110

Specifying Auto Power-Off....110

Specifying Direct Power-On....111

Specifying Silence or Operating Tones 111

Specifying Key Repeat Operation 112

Locking Projector or Remote Buttons 112

Assigning a Channel for Remote Control....113

Reducing Motion Blur....114

Specifying HDMI Input 115

Selecting a Display Language 115

Requiring a Password for Operation....116

Setting a Password ....117

Restoring Original Gamma Settings ....118

Resetting the Lamp Counter 119

■ About the Display of the Lamp Counter 119

Resetting the Air Filter Counter....120

Table of Contents

Updating the Firmware ....121

Resetting to the Default Setting....121

Checking Projector Information 122

Installation and Maintenance....123

Installation....125

Before Installation.... 126

Precautions When Carrying/Shipping the Projector 126

Precautions for Installation....126

■ When Using Mounted on the Ceiling....128

■ Install Facing in the Correct Direction 129

Installation Procedure 130

Setting Up the Projector....130

■ Positioning the Projector in Front of the Screen....130

■ Floor Installation....130

■ Upward-Tilted Installation....130

■ Projection from High Surfaces ...... 131

■ Ceiling Mounting or Rear Projection 132

Relationship of Image Size to Projection Distance....133

■ Lens Shift Function 134

■ Amount of Lens Shift....134

Connection Procedure 136

Connectable Equipment and Input Terminals....136

Connecting a Computer ....137

■ Connecting to RGB Monitor Output Terminal (Analog Connection)....137

■ Connecting to DVI Monitor Output Terminal (Digital Connection)....138

■ Connecting with an HDMI cable (Input signal type: [HDMI])....139

■ Outputting Audio to Speakers ....139

Connecting AV Equipment....140

■ Connecting to Digital Video Output Terminal (Digital Connection) .....140

■ Connecting to Analog Video Output Terminal (Analog Connection)......141

■ Outputting Audio to Speakers .... 142

Plugging the Projector In 143

Starting Projection.... 144

Starting and Stopping Projection ....144

■ Starting Projection....144

■ Stopping Projection....144

■ When the Language Selection Screen Appears ....144

■ When the Password Input Screen Appears .... 144

■ When "No signal" Appears 145

■ When Notebook Computer Screen Does Not Appear....145

■ Adjusting Image 145

Changing Notebook Computer Screen Output 145

■ Turning on External Monitor Output....145

Locking Installation Settings ....146

Flipping Image Display 146

Specifying the Screen Aspect....148

Adjusting the Size of Projected Images (WUX400ST/WX450ST) 149

Specifying Keystone Correction....150

Specifying Digital Image Shift....150

Specifying Micro Digital Image Shift 151

Adjusting Image Registration 151

Specifying the Fan Mode....152

Specifying Vertical Projection 152

Selecting the Audio In Terminal 153

Adjusting Colors to Suit the Screen Color 153

Specifying a Menu Position 154

Showing/Hiding the Guide Screen 154

Showing/Hiding Input Status ....155

Showing/Hiding Overheat Warnings 155

Specifying the Menu Display Time ....156

Showing/Hiding Lamp Replacement Warnings....156

Showing/Hiding Filter Cleaning Warnings....157

Showing/Hiding Split-Screen ID 157

Showing/Hiding the Test Pattern....158

Projecting from Multiple Projectors at Once (Edge Blending) 159

■ Basic Instructions....159

■ Advanced Instructions: Black Level Adjustment 162

■ Advanced Instructions: Smoother Overlapping Areas 164

Connecting to a Network 167

Network Connection Overview.... 168

Connection Methods....168

Completing Projector Settings 169

Locking/Unlocking Network Settings....169

Enabling/Disabling the Network Password 170

Registering a Network Password ....171

Enabling/Disabling Wired Network Functions ....171

Specifying Standby Power Consumption....172

Viewing the IP Address 172

Table of Contents

Viewing the Gateway Address 173

Viewing the MAC Address....173

Enabling/Disabling DHCP....174

Specifying TCP/IP Settings 174

Initializing Network Settings ....175

Specifying PJLink Settings 175

Specifying Use of AMX Device Discovery 176

Specifying Use of Crestron RoomView....177

Completing Computer Settings.... 178

Specifying an IP Address ....178

■ Windows 7....178
■ Windows Vista....179
■ Windows XP....180
■ Mac OS X....180
■ Resetting the IP Address Setting of the Computer 181

Setting Up the Network....181

■ Displaying the Network Configuration Screen....181
■ Network Setting....183
■ Error Notification Mails....194

Control via the Web Screen 195

Maintenance 197

Cleaning the Projector.... 198

Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filter 199

Replacing the Air Filter....199

Cleaning the Air Filter....200

Replacing the Lamp....201

Replacement Lamp 202

Replacing the Lamp 202

■ If the Lamp Cover Comes Off ....204

Networked Multi-Projection (NMPJ)......205

Networked Multi-Projection Overview 207

Introduction to Networked Multi-Projection 208

■ Projection Over a Network ....208
■ Split-Screen Projection of Multiple Images ......208
■ Projection of an Image from Multiple Projectors at Once....208
■ Selecting the Projection Monitor ....209

Installation....210

System Requirements ......210

Installation 211

Uninstallation 213

From Startup to Shutdown.... 215

■ Projection Sessions....219

Operation in Each Mode....221

Using the Projector in Direct Mode 222

Procedure 222

Direct Mode Window....224

Using the Projector in Meeting Mode.... 226

Creating a Session....226

Joining a Session....232

Meeting Mode Window 234

Using the Projector in Classroom Mode....236

Leading a New Session 236

Joining an Existing Session 242

Classroom Mode Window (Starting a Session)....245

Classroom Mode Window (Joining a Session) 247

Using the Projector in Broadcast Mode.... 249

Procedure 249

Broadcast Mode Window 252

Functions in All Modes ......255

Using the Session Selection Menu 256

Session Selection Menu 256

Finding Sessions 257

Using the Projector Selection Menu 258

Projector Selection Menu 258

■ Finding Projectors ....260

■ Selecting Password-Protected Projectors....261

■ Using the Favorites Function ....262

■ Resorting the Projector List....263

■ Turning Projectors On....263

Table of Contents

Using Layout Functions.... 264

■ Switching Projectors Used for the Layout 264
■ Controlling all Projectors at Once....264
■ Projecting from Multiple Projectors (Multi-Projection) 265
■ Switching the Primary/Secondary Monitor 266
■ Temporarily Enlarge Images 266
■ Projecting Session Information 267
■ Fully Blanking Projection....267
■ Blanking Projection from Your Computer....269
■ Checking for Computers That Join or Leave Sessions....270

Completing Application Projection Settings.... 272

Reducing Windows to a Compact Size.... 274

Tips for Better Networked Projection 275

■ Avoid Exceeding Connection Limits....275
■ Operation if Devices Are Disconnected 275
■ If Projectors Cannot Be Detected....275

Restrictions 276

■ Router Connections ......276
■ Security Dialog Box Projection....276
■ Screen Capture Software....276
■ Animated Cursors ....276
■ Alternative Cursors....276
■ Projection Restrictions ......276
■ Network Bandwidth 276
■ Projection through Firewalls....276
■ Application Display....276

Appendix 277

Appendix 279

Troubleshooting.... 280

LED Indicator Meanings ......280

Symptoms and Solutions 281

■ You Cannot Turn on the Projector ....281
■ You Cannot Project an Image from the Projector ....282
■ There is no Sound....283
■ The Projected Image Is Blurred 284
■ You Cannot Project an Image Appropriately....285
■ The Projector Power Turns Off ....285
■ You Cannot Operate the Remote Control....286
■ You Cannot Control Networked Multi-Projection....286

Relationship between Aspect and Screen Aspect.... 287

■ When the image is projected on a 16:10 screen....287
■ When the image is projected on a 16:9 screen....288
■ When the image is projected on a 4:3 screen....288
■ When projecting on a 16:10 screen in the aspect ratio of the connected device ....289
■ When projecting on a 16:9 screen in the aspect ratio of the connected device ....289
■ When projecting on a 4:3 screen in the aspect ratio of the connected device ....290

Displayed Test Patterns 291

Supported Signal Types....292

Product Specifications 294

■ Projector....294
■ Remote control....297
■ External View 298
■ ANALOG PC-2 / COMPONENT terminal....299
■ Service Port (CONTROL)....299

Index....302

Option 305

Safety Instructions

Before installing and operating the projector, read this manual thoroughly.

This projector provides many convenient features and functions. Operating the projector properly enables you to manage those features and maintain it in good condition for many years to come.

Improper operation may result in not only shortening the product life, but also malfunctions, fire hazards, or other accidents.

If your projector does not seem to be operating properly, read this manual again, check operations and cable connections, and try the solutions in the

“Troubleshooting” section in the back of this manual. If the problem still persists, contact the Canon Customer Support Center.

CANON XEED WX520 - Safety Instructions - 1

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN

CANON XEED WX520 - Safety Instructions - 2

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE EXCEPT LAMP REPLACEMENT. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CANON XEED WX520 - Safety Instructions - 3

THIS SYMBOL INDICATES THAT DANGEROUS VOLTAGE CONSTITUTING A RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK IS PRESENT WITHIN THIS UNIT.

CANON XEED WX520 - Safety Instructions - 4

THIS SYMBOL INDICATES THAT THERE ARE IMPORTANT OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS FOR THIS UNIT IN THE OWNER'S MANUAL.

CAUTION

Not for use in a computer room as defined in the Standard for the Protection of Electronic Computer / Data Processing Equipment, ANSI / NFPA 75.

CANON XEED WX520 - CAUTION - 1

Safety Precautions

WARNING:

• THIS APPARATUS MUST BE GROUNDED.
• TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

  • This projector produces intense light from the projection lens. Do not stare directly into the lens, otherwise eye damage could result. Be especially careful that children do not stare directly into the beam.
    • Install the projector in a proper position. Otherwise it may result in a fire hazard.
  • Allowing the proper amount of space on the top, sides, and rear of the projector cabinet is critical for proper air circulation and cooling of the unit. The diagrams shown here indicates the minimum space required. If the projector is to be built into a compartment or similarly enclosed, these minimum distances must be maintained.

CANON XEED WX520 - WARNING: - 1

  • Do not cover the ventilation slots on the projector. Heat build-up can reduce the service life of your projector, and can also be dangerous.
  • If the projector is unused for an extended time, unplug the projector from the power outlet.
  • Do not project the same image for a long time.

An afterimage may remain on the LCD panels due to the characteristics of the panels of the projector.

CANON XEED WX520 - WARNING: - 2

CAUTION ON HANGING FROM THE CEILING

When hanging the projector from the ceiling, clean the air intake vents and top of the projector periodically with a vacuum cleaner. If you leave the projector unclean for a long time, the cooling fans can be clogged with dust, and it may cause a breakdown or a disaster.

DO NOT SET THE PROJECTOR IN GREASY, WET, OR SMOKY CONDITIONS SUCH AS IN A KITCHEN TO PREVENT A BREAKDOWN OR A DISASTER. IF THE PROJECTOR COMES IN CONTACT WITH OIL OR CHEMICALS, IT MAY BECOME DETERIORATED.

■ READ AND KEEP THIS OWNER'S MANUAL FOR LATER USE.

All the safety and operating instructions should be read before beginning to operate the product.

Read all of the instructions given here and retain them for later use. Unplug this projector from the AC power supply before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners on the projector. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.

Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the projector.

For added protection of the projector during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended or unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet. This will prevent damage due to lightning and power surges.

Do not expose this unit to rain or use near water... for example, in a wet basement, near a swimming pool, etc...

Do not use attachments not recommended by the manufacturer as they may result in hazards.

Do not place this projector on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The projector may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the projector. Use only with a cart or stand recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the projector. Wall or shelf mounting should be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, and should use a mounting kit approved by the manufacturers.

An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Sudden stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ READ AND KEEP THIS OWNER'S MANUAL FOR LATER USE. - 1

Slots and openings in the rear and front of the cabinet are provided for ventilation, to insure reliable operation of the equipment and to protect it from overheating.

The openings should never be covered with cloth or other materials, and the bottom opening should not be blocked by placing the projector on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This projector should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register.

This projector should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a book case unless proper ventilation is provided.

Never push objects of any kind into this projector through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind onto the projector.

Do not install the projector near the ventilation duct of air-conditioning equipment.

This projector should be operated using only the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supplied, contact the Canon Customer Support Center or local power company.

Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in fire or electric shock. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this projector where the cord may be damaged by people walking on it.

Do not attempt to service this projector yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

Unplug this projector from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions:

a. When the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed.
b. If liquid has been spilled into the projector.
c. If the projector has been exposed to rain or water.
d. If the projector does not operate normally after following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered in the operating instructions as improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the projector to normal operating condition.

e. If the projector has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.

f. When the projector exhibits a distinct change in performance—this indicates a need for servicing.

When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician uses replacement parts specified by the manufacturer that have the same characteristics as the original parts. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or injury.

Upon completion of any service or repairs to this projector, ask the service technician to perform routine safety checks to determine that the projector is in safe operating condition.

AC Power Cord Requirement

The AC Power Cord supplied with this projector meets the requirements for use in the country you purchased it.

AC Power Cord for the United States and Canada:

The AC Power Cord used in the United States and Canada is listed by the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and certified by the Canadian Standard Association (CSA).

The AC Power Cord has a grounding-type AC line plug. This is a safety feature to ensure the plug fits into the power outlet. Do not try to tamper with this safety feature. Should you be unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician.

CANON XEED WX520 - AC Power Cord for the United States and Canada: - 1

natural_image Diagram of a hand holding an electrical plug with labeled 'Ground' (no other text or symbols)

THE SOCKET-OUTLET SHOULD BE INSTALLED NEAR THE EQUIPMENT AND EASILY ACCESSIBLE.

CANON XEED WX520 - THE SOCKET-OUTLET SHOULD BE INSTALLED NEAR THE EQUIPMENT AND EASILY ACCESSIBLE. - 1

For the U.S. and Canada, LAMP (S) INSIDE THIS PRODUCT CONTAIN MERCURY AND MUST BE RECYCLED OR DISPOSED OF ACCORDING TO LOCAL, MUNICIPAL, STATE, PROVINCIAL, OR FEDERAL LAWS.

For lamp recycling and disposal information please call 1-800-OK-CANON for the U.S. and Canada.

CANON XEED WX520 - THE SOCKET-OUTLET SHOULD BE INSTALLED NEAR THE EQUIPMENT AND EASILY ACCESSIBLE. - 2

Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)

These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the WEEE Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation implementing those Directives.

CANON XEED WX520 - Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein) - 1

If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive, this indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a concentration above an applicable threshold specified in the Battery Directive.

CANON XEED WX520 - Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein) - 2

This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources.

For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, waste authority, approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit

www.canon-europe.com/weee, or www.canon-europe.com/battery.

Federal Communication Commission Notice

Multimedia Projector, Model: WUX450/WX520/WUX400ST/WX450ST

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

  • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
  • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
  • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
  • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio / TV technician for help.

The cable with a ferrite core provided with the projector must be used with this equipment in order to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC rules.

Use of a shielded cable is required to comply with class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.

Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the instructions. If such changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.

Canon U.S.A. Inc.

One Canon Park, Melville, New York 11747, U.S.A.

Tel No. (631) 330-5000

Safety Symbols in this Manual

This section describes the safety symbols used in this manual. Important projector safety information is identified by the following symbols. Always observe the safety information by these symbols.

CANON XEED WX520 - Safety Symbols in this Manual - 1

Denotes the risk of death or serious injury from improper handling if the information is not observed. To ensure safe use, always observe this information.

CANON XEED WX520 - Safety Symbols in this Manual - 2

Denotes the risk of injury from improper handling if the information is not observed. To ensure safe use, always observe this information.

CANON XEED WX520 - Safety Symbols in this Manual - 3

Prohibition

CANON XEED WX520 - Safety Symbols in this Manual - 4

Denotes prohibited actions.

Caution

Denotes required actions or information that must be observed.

Precautions for Use

As this section contains important safety-related information, be sure to read the following carefully beforehand in order to use your projector correctly and safely.

CANON XEED WX520 - Precautions for Use - 1

Warning

During installation, keep the projector plug easily accessible so that the projector can be unplugged immediately if necessary, or keep a circuit breaker within reach.

If the following situations occur, turn the power off, remove the power plug from the power outlet and contact the Canon Customer Support Center. Failure to do so could cause a fire or result in an electric shock.

  • If smoke is emitted
  • If an unusual smell or noise is emitted
  • If water or other liquid has entered the projector
  • If metal or any other foreign material has entered the projector
  • If the projector is knocked over or dropped and the cabinet is damaged

Pay attention to the following points for handling the power cord. Failure to do so may cause a fire, electric shock or personal injury.

  • Do not place any objects on the power cord and do not allow it to become trapped under the projector.
  • Do not cover the power cord with a carpet.
  • Do not modify or excessively bend, twist, pull, wind, or bundle the power cord.
  • Keep the power cord away from heaters and other sources of heat.
  • Do not use a damaged power cord. If the power cord is damaged, purchase a replacement from your dealer.
  • The power cord included with this projector is for use exclusively with this product. Do not use this cord for other products.

- Be sure to connect the ground wire of the power cord to ground.

- Be sure to connect the ground wire before connecting the power plug to the outlet. Also when you disconnect the ground wire, be sure to unplug the power plug from the outlet beforehand.

CANON XEED WX520 - Warning - 1
Prohibition

CANON XEED WX520 - Warning - 2

Warning

Pay attention to the following points regarding the power source, power plug and handling of the connector. Failure to do so may cause a fire, electric shock or personal injury.

CANON XEED WX520 - Warning - 1

Prohibition

- Do not use any power source with a voltage other than the voltage indicated (AC 100–240 V).

- Do not pull the power cord and be sure to hold the power plug or connector when removing. Incorrect handling may damage the power cord.

- Do not insert any metal objects into the contact parts of the power plug or connector.

- Do not remove the power plug or connector with wet hands.

- Insert the power plug and connector securely up to the base. Additionally, do not use a damaged power plug or an outlet that is loose.

- When using an extension cord, do not exceed the cord's rated capacity.

CANON XEED WX520 - Warning - 2

Caution

CANON XEED WX520 - Warning - 3

Caution

- Periodically inspect the power plug and outlet and remove any dust or dirt from between the plug and the outlet.

Installation and Handling Precautions

Pay attention to the following points regarding installation and handling of the projector. Failure to do so may cause a fire, electric shock or personal injury.

- Do not use the projector where it might get wet, such as outdoors or by bathtubs or showers.

- Do not place containers containing a liquid on top of the projector.

- Do not touch the projector itself, the power cord, or the cable if lightening strikes.

- Do not move the projector until you have switched off the power, removed the power plug from the power outlet and unplugged any other cables.

- Unplug the projector before cleaning or maintenance.

CANON XEED WX520 - Installation and Handling Precautions - 1

Warning

Pay attention to the following points regarding installation and handling of the projector. Failure to do so may cause a fire, electric shock or personal injury.

CANON XEED WX520 - Warning - 1

Prohibition

- Do not remove the cabinet from the projector or disassemble it. The interior of the projector contains high-voltage components as well as parts that are hot. If inspection, maintenance or repair is required, contact the Canon Customer Support Center.

- Do not disassemble or modify the projector (including consumable parts) or the remote control.

- Do not look directly into the exhaust vents during use.

- Do not insert any object into vents in the projector, such as the air intake vent or exhaust vents.

- Do not place a pressurized can in front of the exhaust vents. The pressure of the contents of the can may increase due to heat from the exhaust vents and this could result in an explosion.

- When cleaning off dust or dirt from the projector lens etc., do not use any kind of spray that is flammable. As the temperature of the lamp inside the projector is high, it could ignite, causing a fire.

- As strong light beams are emitted while the projector is in use, do not look directly into the projector lens. Doing so could cause an eye injury. Pay particular attention to prevent small children from doing so.

- When setting the projector on a high surface for projection, be sure the surface is flat and stable.

- For ceiling mounting precautions, refer to the installation manual included with the ceiling mount (sold separately).

CANON XEED WX520 - Warning - 2

Prohibition

Precautions on the Lamp

This projector uses a high-pressure mercury lamp, which must be handled carefully and correctly as described below.

The mercury lamp has the following characteristics.

• The lamp will gradually become darker over time.
- Impact, abrasion, or use of worn-out lamps may cause lamps to rupture (accompanied by a loud noise) or burn out.
- Lamps are more likely to rupture after the lamp replacement message is displayed (see “Replacing the Lamp” (P201)). Replace the lamp with a new one as soon as possible.
- Useful life of lamps varies widely from lamp to lamp and depending on the environment of use. Some lamps may fail or rupture soon after they are first used.
- Be prepared by keeping a spare lamp.

CANON XEED WX520 - Precautions on the Lamp - 1

Warning

Note the following precautions during lamp replacement or when a lamp has ruptured. Failure to do so could result in an electric shock or personal injury.

  • Before replacing the lamp, always unplug the projector and wait at least an hour.
  • Ruptured lamps may scatter shards of glass inside the projector. Contact the Canon Customer Support Center for cleaning and inspection of the projector interior and lamp replacement.

Precautions when replacing lamps that stop working

CANON XEED WX520 - Warning - 1

- If illumination suddenly stops, either when you turn the projector on or after it has been on for a while, the lamp may have ruptured. In this case, never attempt to replace the lamp by yourself. Always request service from the Canon Customer Support Center.

- With ceiling-mounted projectors, the lamp may fall out when you open the lamp cover, or during replacement. During replacement, stand to the side of the lamp cover, not directly under it.

- If the lamp ruptures, dust and gas (containing mercury vapor) may come out of the exhaust vents. If this happens, immediately open the windows and doors to provide ventilation to the room.

- If you accidentally inhale gas from the lamp or get any pieces in your eyes or mouth, consult a doctor immediately.

Precautions for the Batteries of the Remote Control

Pay attention to the following points regarding handling of batteries. Failing to do so could result in a fire or personal injury.

CANON XEED WX520 - Precautions for the Batteries of the Remote Control - 1

- Do not heat, short circuit or disassemble the batteries, or place them in a fire.

- Do not attempt to recharge the batteries that are included with the remote control.

- Remove the batteries when they are flat or when the remote control will not be used for a long period of time.

- When replacing the batteries, replace both at the same time. Also, do not use two batteries of a different type at the same time.

- Insert the batteries with the + and - terminals in the correct directions.

- If any liquid from inside the batteries leaks out and contacts your skin, be sure to wash the liquid off thoroughly.

CANON XEED WX520 - Precautions for the Batteries of the Remote Control - 2

CANON XEED WX520 - Precautions for the Batteries of the Remote Control - 3

Caution

Pay attention to the following points regarding installation and handling of the projector.

- If the projector will not be used for a long period of time, be sure to remove the power plug from the power outlet to ensure safety. Failure to do so presents a risk of fire if dust accumulates on the plug or outlet.

- Parts of the cabinet around and above the exhaust vents may become hot during projection. Touching these areas during operation could cause burns to the hands. Pay particular attention in preventing young children from touching these parts. Additionally, do not place any metal objects around or above the exhaust vents. Due to the heat from the projector, doing so could cause an accident or personal injury.

- Do not place the projector where it may be exposed to oily smoke or steam, such as near kitchen counters or humidifiers. Doing so may cause fire or electric shock.

- Do not place any heavy objects on top of the projector or sit / stand on it. Pay particular attention to prevent small children from doing so. The projector may be knocked over and this could result in damage or a personal injury.

- Do not place the projector on an unstable or slanted surface. Doing so may cause the projector to fall or be knocked over and could result in a personal injury.

- Do not place any objects in front of the lens during projection. Doing so could cause a fire.

- Presenters in front of the projector should stand where the light does not seem too bright, and where their shadow does not fall on the screen.

When handling the lamp, pay attention to the following points.

CANON XEED WX520 - Caution - 1

Prohibition

- Be sure not to handle the lamp immediately after it has been used. Be sure to switch off the power and wait for approximately 1 hour for the lamp and the projector to cool down sufficiently. Failure to do so could result in a burn or personal injury due to heat from the lamp or projector.

CANON XEED WX520 - Caution - 2

Prohibition

! Caution

Pay attention to the following points when carrying or transporting the projector.

  • This projector is a precision instrument. Do not knock it over or subject it to impacts. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
  • Do not reuse any packaging or shock-absorbent materials that were supplied with the projector at the time of purchase for transporting or shipping the projector. Protection of the projector cannot be guaranteed if used packaging or shock-absorbent materials are reused. Fragments from shock-absorbent material may also enter the interior of the projector which could cause a malfunction.
  • Disconnect the cables connected to the projector. Carrying the projector while the cables are attached may cause an accident.
  • Retract the adjustable feet before moving the projector. Leaving the feet extended may cause damage.
  • Attach the lens cap to protect the lens.

CANON XEED WX520 - ! Caution - 1

! Caution

Pay attention to the following points when installing or using the projector.

- Do not touch the lens with bare hands. Doing so may result in deterioration of image quality. - If the projector is abruptly taken from a cool to a warm location, condensation may form on the lens or mirrors, which may cause a blurred image. Wait until the condensation has evaporated for the image projected to return to normal.

- Do not install the projector in a location where the temperature is high or low. Doing so may cause a malfunction. For guidelines on operating temperatures, see "Product Specifications".

- Do not place any objects on top of the projector that may change shape or color due to heat.

- Projector settings must be adjusted when using the projector at high altitudes or in upward or downward projection. Failure to adjust the settings may shorten the lamp life or damage the lamp. For details, contact the Canon Customer Support Center.

- Do not install the projector near high-voltage electrical power lines or an electrical power source.

- Do not use the projector on a soft surface such as carpet or sponge mat, etc. Doing so could cause heat to build up inside the projector and this could result in a malfunction.

- Do not block the air intake or exhaust vents of the cooling fan. If the air intake or exhaust vent is blocked, heat cannot be released from inside the projector, which may shorten the useful life of the lamp or cause malfunction.

- Installing the projector in the wrong direction may cause a malfunction or accident. Do not install the projector with one side raised, or with the projector tilted toward the left or right.

• Install the projector with sufficient space between air intakes and exhaust vents and walls. Failure to do so could cause a malfunction.

- Do not install the projector in a location that is damp, or where there is a lot of dust, oily smoke or tobacco smoke. Doing so could cause contamination of optical components such as the lens and the mirror and may result in deterioration of image quality.

CANON XEED WX520 - ! Caution - 1

Before Use

Table of Contents

Safety Instructions

Before Use

Operation

Projecting an Image

Useful Functions Available During a Presentation

Setting Functions from Menus

Installation and Maintenance

Installation

Connecting to a Network

Maintenance

Networked Multi-Projection

Networked Multi-Projection Overview

Operation in Each Mode

Functions in All Modes

Appendix

Other Information

Index

Supplied Accessories

Check that the following accessories have been supplied with the projector.

- Remote control • Batteries for the remote control

CANON XEED WX520 - Supplied Accessories - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a remote control with buttons and dials (no text or symbols on the device itself)

(part No.: RS-RC06)

CANON XEED WX520 - Supplied Accessories - 2
(AAA size x2)

CANON XEED WX520 - Supplied Accessories - 3

Optional remote controls are also available (RS-RC04, RS-RC05). However, some buttons are not supported with this projector. The RS-RC05 can also be used as a wired remote. (P36)

- Lens cap

CANON XEED WX520 - Supplied Accessories - 4

CANON XEED WX520 - Supplied Accessories - 5

natural_image Simple concentric circle diagram with a central dot (no text or symbols)

WUX450/WX520 WUX400ST/WX450ST

• Computer cable (1.8 m / 5.9') (mini D-sub 15-pin / mini D-sub 15-pin)

CANON XEED WX520 - Supplied Accessories - 6

natural_image Illustration of a long, coiled cable with two connected VGA connectors (no text or symbols)

- User's Manual (CD-ROM)

• Power cord (1.8 m / 5.9')

For Continental Europe For the U.S.A. and

For the U.S.A. and Canada

CANON XEED WX520 - Supplied Accessories - 8

- Warranty Card

- Important Information

■Attaching the Lens Cap

When using the WUX450/WX520, align the lens cap notch with the optical zoom adjustment lever as shown and attach the cap.

There is no need to align the lens cap when using the WUX400ST/WX450ST.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■Attaching the Lens Cap - 1

Always remove the cap before projection. Accidentally leaving the cap on during projection may distort the cap and damage the projector.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■Attaching the Lens Cap - 2

natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with a cylindrical housing and threaded shaft (no text or symbols)

Preparing the Remote Control

■ Installing Remote Control Batteries

1 Open the battery compartment lid. Slide the lid while pressing it down.

2Insert batteries. Insert 2 new AAA batteries in the compartment with the + and – poles positioned correctly.

3Close the compartment lid. Slide the lid until you hear a click to securely close it.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Installing Remote Control Batteries - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a remote control device with an arrow indicating left-side motion (no text or symbols)

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Installing Remote Control Batteries - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a remote control device with an attached battery (no text or symbols)

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Installing Remote Control Batteries - 3

natural_image Line drawing of a remote control device with buttons and an arrow indicator (no text or symbols)

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Installing Remote Control Batteries - 4

  • If buttons on the remote control are inoperative when you attempt to operate the projector, replace the batteries with new ones.
  • Do not drop the remote control or subject it to impact.
  • Do not spill any liquids on the remote control. Doing so could damage it.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Installing Remote Control Batteries - 5

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Installing Remote Control Batteries - 6

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Installing Remote Control Batteries - 7

Pay attention to the following points when handling the batteries. Failing to do so could result in a fire or personal injury.

  • Do not heat, short circuit or disassemble the batteries, or place them in a fire.
  • Do not attempt to recharge the batteries that are included with the remote control.
  • Remove the batteries when they are flat or when the remote control will not be used for a long period of time.
  • When replacing the batteries, replace both at the same time. Also, do not use two batteries of a different type at the same time.
  • Insert the batteries with the + and - terminals in the correct directions.
  • If any liquid from inside the batteries leaks out and contacts your skin, be sure to wash the liquid off thoroughly.

■ Remote Control Operating Range

The remote control is an infrared type. Point it at the infrared remote receiver on the front or rear of the projector to operate it.

WUX450/WX520 WUX400ST/WX450ST
25° 25° 8 m (26.3') 25° 8 m (26.3') 25°

25° 4 m (13.1') 25° 8 m (26.3')

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Remote Control Operating Range - 3

  • Use the remote control within an angle of 25^ in any direction from directly in front of the infrared remote receiver.
  • The remote control may be inoperative if there is an obstacle between the remote control and the projector or the infrared remote receiver on the projector is exposed to direct sunlight or strong light of lighting equipment.
  • When you use 2 or more projectors at the same time, you can change the channel settings to prevent the 2 remote controls from interfering with each other. (P113)

■ Using an Optional Wired Remote (RS-RC05)

To use a wired remote control with the projector, use the RS-RC05, sold separately. Use a cable with a 3.5 mm stereo mini jack (not included).

Remote control (RS-RC05) Terminal for wired remote control Ø3.5 mm stereo mini jack cable (not included)

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Using an Optional Wired Remote (RS-RC05) - 2

  • Infrared operations cannot be performed if a cable is connected to the projector or the remote control.
  • Use a cable with a 3.5 mm stereo mini jack (not included) with a length of 30m (98.4') or less.

Projector (WUX450/WX520)

■ Front Side

Side control (P42) Hole caps (P131) Attach option feet (sold separately). For instructions on removing the hole caps, refer to "Attaching Option Feet (RS-FT01, Sold Separately)". Projection lens (P45) Infrared remote receiver (P35) Terminals and connectors (P44) Air intake vent Air filter (P199) Power cord connector (P143) Do not block the air intake. Doing so may cause a malfunction. Before projection, always remove the cap. Leaving the cap on may damage the projector. Caution

■ Rear Side

Lamp cover Exhaust vent Do not block the air exhaust. Doing so may cause a malfunction. Lens shift side control (P45) Infrared remote receiver (P35) Anti-theft lock hole An anti-theft wire cable (not included) can be connected.

■ Bottom Side

Adjustable feet (P130)

Projector (WUX400ST/WX450ST)

■ Front Side

Side control (P42) Hole caps (P131) Attach option feet (sold separately). For instructions on removing the hole caps, refer to "Attaching Option Feet (RS-FT01, Sold Separately)". Projection lens (P45) Infrared remote receiver (P35) Terminals and connectors (P44) Air intake vent Air filter (P199) Power cord connector (P143) Do not block the air intake. Doing so may cause a malfunction. Caution

■ Rear Side

Lamp cover Exhaust vent Do not block the air exhaust. Doing so may cause a malfunction. Lens shift side control (P45) Infrared remote receiver (P35) Anti-theft lock hole An anti-theft wire cable (not included) can be connected.

■ Bottom Side

Adjustable feet (P130)

Mounting the Projector on the Ceiling

You can mount the projector on the ceiling.

The ceiling attachment (part No.: RS-CL12 (WUX450/WX520), RS-CL13 (WUX400ST/WX450ST)) is required in order to mount the projector on the ceiling. Depending on the installation environment, an extension pipe (part No.: RS-CL08 or RS-CL09) may also be required. Contact the Canon Customer Support Center for more detailed information.

CANON XEED WX520 - Mounting the Projector on the Ceiling - 1
Caution

• Make sure to use the optional ceiling attachment.
- You should never install the ceiling attachment by yourself.

CANON XEED WX520 - Mounting the Projector on the Ceiling - 2

If you mount the projector on the ceiling, you have to invert the projected image by selecting [Image flip H/V] from the menu. (P146)

CANON XEED WX520 - Mounting the Projector on the Ceiling - 3

natural_image Line drawing of a mechanical device with a mounted bracket and base plate (no text or symbols)

Remote control

The projector can be operated using buttons on the remote control or the side control on the projector.

The remote control allows you to operate all functions of the projector.

POWER button (P52, P74)

Turns the projector on or off.

BLANK button (P76)

Toggles between display / non-display of image.

ASPECT button (P67)

Changes the aspect ratio mode.

KEYSTONE button (P68)

Corrects keystone distortion.

The [Keystone] setting enables both horizontal/vertical keystone correction (by adjusting top/bottom/left/right length) and corner correction.

D.ZOOM button (P78)

Zooms the image in or out digitally.

[+] button: Zooms the image in (up to 12x).

[−] button: Zooms the image out (1x minimum).

[▲/ [ ]▼[ ] / [◀] buttons:

Move the zoom-in location.

IMAGE button (P71)

Switches the image mode (image quality).

GAMMA button (P100)

Adjusts the gamma of the image.

[▶button: Corrects dark parts of the image so that they are easier to see.

[★button: Corrects bright parts of the image so that they are easier to see.

POWER INPUT BLANK FREEZE AUTO PC ASPECT ch1/ 1 MENU/chALL Ch4/ 4 OK Ch2/ 2 KEYSTONE ch3/ 3 EXIT D.ZOOM TEST PATTERN VOL - IMAGE SPLIT MUTE GAMMA ECO Fn Canon RS-RC06

INPUT button (P54)

Switches the input signal.

AUTO PC button (P57)

Adjusts tracking etc. automatically in accordance with the signal from a computer when the analog PC input is selected.

Displays a menu on the screen. Also used to assign a channel to the remote control. (P113)

FREEZE button (P76)

Freezes the projected image.

Pointer buttons (P85)

Selects the upper, lower, left or right item in the menu. Also used to assign a channel to the remote control. (P113)

OK button (P85)

Determines the item selected from the menu.

EXIT button (P86)

Cancels functions such as menu display or test pattern during operation and returns to the image display.

VOL button (P77)

Adjusts the sound volume. [+] button: Increases the volume. [-] button: Decreases the volume.

TEST PATTERN button (P158)

Displays the test pattern.

MUTE button (P77)

Mutes the sound.

SPLIT button (P81)

Activates the split screen function.

Fn button

Cannot be used on this product.

ECO button (P73)

Displays the Eco menu, to complete power-saving settings.

Side Control

(6) MENU (5)(7) + OE OK KEystone AUTO PC INPUT POWER (1)(2)(3)(4)

(1) POWER button (P52, P74) Turns the projector on or off.
(2) INPUT button (P54) Switches the input signal.
(3) AUTO PC button (P57) Adjusts tracking etc. automatically in accordance with the signal from a computer when the analog PC input is selected.
(4) KEYSTONE button (P68) Corrects keystone distortion.

(5) Pointer / VOL buttons (P77, P85) Adjust the sound volume.

[▲VOL+ button: Increases the volume.

[▼VOL- button: Decreases the volume.

Selects the upper, lower, left or right item in the menu.

(6) OK button (P85) Determines the item selected from the menu.
(7) MENU button (P84) Displays a menu on the screen.

LED indicators

POWER ON WARNING LAMP TEMP

The projector status is shown by the LED indicators (off / lit / flashing). For indicator status, refer to "LED Indicator Displays" (P43).

  • POWER ON (green) : Lights up or flashes under normal conditions when the power is on.
  • WARNING (red) : Lights up or flashes when an error occurs.
  • LAMP (orange) : Flashes when the time for replacing the lamp is near.
    When a lamp cover error occurs, the [WARNING] indicator will also flash. When a lamp error occurs, it will illuminate at the same time as the [WARNING] indicator.
  • TEMP (red): When the temperature inside the projector is high, it will flash. If the temperature inside the projector increases further and a temperature error occurs, it will illuminate at the same time that the [WARNING] indicator illuminates.

■ LED Indicator Displays

The LED indicators flash or illuminate to indicate the operating status of the projector.

LED indicatorOperating status
POWER ON (green)WARNING (red)LAMP (orange)TEMP (red)
A projector is not plugged in.
Power is on.
A projector is in standby mode (blinks slowly: every 4 seconds).
Waking from or entering standby mode (blinks: every second).
The time for replacing the lamp is near. (In standby mode.)
The time for replacing the lamp is near. (During projection)
Internal temperature is high.
A lamp error has occurred.
Power was turned off due to high internal temperature.
The lamp cover is open.
Another error has occurred.

Input Terminal

(1) (3) AUDIO OUT REMOTE 1 2 AUDIO IN (2) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) 1 DVI-H 2 / COMPONENT HDMI CONTROL

(1) AUDIO OUT terminal (AUDIO OUT) (P139, P142)

Outputs the audio to external AV equipment. This outputs the audio signal that corresponds to the projected image signal.

(2) AUDIO IN terminal (AUDIO IN) (P137, P138, P141)

Receives the audio signal input for 2 kinds of image input other than HDMI.

The internal speaker outputs the audio for the selected image signal.

(3) Terminal for wired remote control (REMOTE) (P36)

This terminal is used to connect the remote control using a cable.

(4) USB port (P79)

Connects a USB flash drive. Used for projection of images on a USB flash drive, or for firmware updates.

(5) DVI-I input terminal ( DVI-I) (P138)

Connects the external monitor output from a computer.

Receives analog and digital PC signals (Analog PC-1 and Digital PC, respectively).

(6) ANALOG PC / COMPONENT input terminal (/COMPONENT)

(P137, P141)

Receives the analog PC signal (Analog PC-2).

A component cable can be used to receive the component image signal (Component).

(7) HDMI input terminal (HDMI) (P139)

Receives digital video signals (HDMI).

Carries both video and audio signals across a single cable.

(8) LAN port (P168)

Connects the LAN cable (shielded twisted pair).

Used to connect the projector to a network.

(9) Service port (CONTROL)

It is not used during ordinary use.

Lens Shift Control

(1) (2)

(1) Vertical lens shift dial

Slides the lens up or down for vertical image adjustment.

(2) Horizontal lens shift dial

Slides the lens left or right for horizontal image adjustment. For details on lens shift, refer to "Lens Shift Function" (P134).

Projection Lens

WUX450/WX520 WUX400ST/WX450ST
(1) (2)

CANON XEED WX520 - Projection Lens - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a projector with labeled parts (2), showing internal structure and mounting base (no text or symbols beyond label)

(1) Optical zoom adjustment (WUX450/WX520)

Move the lever to resize the image. (P57)

(2) Focus adjustment

Turn the focus ring to adjust image focus. (P59)

Open Source Software

The product contains Open Source Software modules. For details, see

"ThirdPartySoftware.pdf" (Third-Party Software License) in the

OpenSourceSoftware folder in the LICENSE folder on the Setup CD-ROM. Each

module's license conditions are also available in the same folder.

■ Software under the GPL and LGPL

The product includes modules licensed under the GPL and LGPL.

Source code can be examined in the GPL and LGPL folders on the supplied Setup CD-ROM.

■ Software under the GNU General Public License Version 2

Contained programs are free software; you can redistribute them and/or modify them under the terms of the GNU General Public License attached to each copy of the program.

Each program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Please see “NO WARRANTY” and “NO SUPPORT” stated below. For more detail, please see full text of the GNU General Public License.

NO WARRANTY

BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

NO SUPPORT

Canon Inc., and all its subsidiaries or its dealers do not make any support service regarding the source code. Canon Inc., and all its subsidiaries or its dealers shall not respond to any questions or enquiries, from you or any other customers, regarding the source code.

MULTIMEDIA PROJECTOR

WUX450

WX520

WUX400ST

WX450ST

Operation

CANON XEED WX520 - Operation - 1

natural_image Two white and black cameras with visible lens and control buttons, shown from different angles (no text or symbols on the devices themselves)

Projecting an Image

Table of Contents

Safety Instructions

Before Use

Operation

Projecting an Image

Useful Functions Available During a Presentation

Setting Functions from Menus

Installation and Maintenance

Installation

Connecting to a Network

Maintenance

Networked Multi-Projection

Networked Multi-Projection Overview

Operation in Each Mode

Functions in All Modes

Appendix

Other Information

Index

1 Check the connection between the projector and the computer or AV equipment. (P137 - P140)

For instructions on connecting the power cord, refer to "Plugging the Projector In" (P143).

2Press the POWER button.

The [POWER ON] indicator initially flashes green, after which it remains lit.

Remote control Projector

POWER INPUT BLANK FREEZE AUTO PC ASPECT α1/1 MENU/chALL

AUTO PC INPUT POWER

The countdown window is displayed for approximately 20 seconds, and then the projection is started. Press the OK or EXIT button to make the countdown window disappear.

CANON XEED WX520 - 2Press the POWER button. - 3

• Network functions are not available for the first 40 seconds after startup.
- A window appears when the projector is turned on for the first time. You can select a language to be used by the projector for displaying menus and messages in the window. Select the desired language with the pointer buttons and press the OK button. (P144)

You can change the language from the menu at a later time. (P115)

- If the language selection screen is out of focus, adjust the focus. (P59)

3Turn on the computer or AV equipment power.

Changing Operations When Projector is Turned On

You can change operations when the projector is turned on as follows.

  • You can turn on the projector by connecting the power cord, without pressing the POWER button. (P111)
  • You can change the countdown window. (P110)
  • You can skip the countdown window. (P110)

When the Projector Is Left Idle

If no signal is received, the projector automatically turns off after a certain period of inactivity (by default, 15 minutes). (P110)

Step 2 Select an Input Signal

Select the input signal in the [Input] menu when you want to project a digital PC or AV equipment signal, or to switch between inputs when multiple computers or multiple sets of AV equipment are connected.

Skip this step if you have not changed the input signal since the last projection.

Types of Input Signals

The table below shows the relationship among input signals supported by the projector, input terminals and connection cables.

Input signalInput terminal Typesof connection cables
HDMICANON XEED WX520 - Types of Input Signals - 1HDMIHDMI cable (not included)CANON XEED WX520 - Types of Input Signals - 2
Digital PCCANON XEED WX520 - Types of Input Signals - 31 DVI-IDVI cable (not included)CANON XEED WX520 - Types of Input Signals - 4
AnalogPC-1CANON XEED WX520 - Types of Input Signals - 51 DVI-IVGA-DVI cable (not included)CANON XEED WX520 - Types of Input Signals - 6
AnalogPC-2CANON XEED WX520 - Types of Input Signals - 72/COMPONENTComputer cable (supplied)CANON XEED WX520 - Types of Input Signals - 8
CANON XEED WX520 - Types of Input Signals - 92/COMPONENTBNC cable (not included)CANON XEED WX520 - Types of Input Signals - 10Mini D-sub 15-terminal converter cable (not included) BNC cable (not included)
ComponentCANON XEED WX520 - Types of Input Signals - 112/COMPONENTComponent cable (not included)CANON XEED WX520 - Types of Input Signals - 12- RCA plug/version cableRCA plug - RCA plugcomponent cable (not included)
LANCANON XEED WX520 - Types of Input Signals - 13LANLAN cable (shielded twisted pair) (not included)CANON XEED WX520 - Types of Input Signals - 14
USBCANON XEED WX520 - Types of Input Signals - 15USBConnect a USB flash drive. (P79)

Selecting an Input Signal

1 Press the INPUT button to display the window shown below.

Remote control Projector POWER INPUT BLANK FREEZE AUTO PC ASPECT α1/ MENU/OHALL AUTO PC INPUT POWER

Input HDMI Digital PC Analog PC-1 Analog PC-2 Component LAN USB USB

The currently active input signal is marked with a green circle and enclosed by a orange border.

An input signal that is ready for projection is displayed in white. When no signal is received, it is displayed in gray. However, [Digital PC] or [Analog PC-1] may be displayed in gray even if these signals are ready for projection.

2You can switch the available input signal types by pressing the INPUT button.

- You can select the target input signal with [ ]/ [ ].▼

3Press the OK button to confirm the input signal type.

CANON XEED WX520 - 3Press the OK button to confirm the input signal type. - 1

  • Screens of computers connected to the projector over a network can be projected when you have selected [LAN] as the input signal. For details, refer to Networked Multi-Projection (NMPJ).
  • Images on USB flash drives can be projected when you have selected [USB] as the input signal. For details, refer to "Projecting Images on a USB Flash Drive" (P79).
  • In split-screen mode, the side without control rights is identified by a white circle.

Step 3 Adjust the Image

Setting the Display Resolution of the Computer

Based on the maximum resolution of the projector, set the display resolution of the computer to the resolution closest to the output signal resolution of the projector. (P292)

Maximum resolution

WUX450/WUX400ST : 1920 X 1200 dots

WX520/WX450ST : 1440 X 900 dots

Windows 8

1Move the cursor toward the upper or lower right corner to access the menu.
2Click [Settings], and then click [Control Panel].
3From [Control Panel Home] - [Appearance and Personalization], select [Adjust screen resolution].
4Select the resolution closest to the maximum output signal resolution of the projector from the [Resolution] list.
5Click the [OK] button.

Windows 7

1 Open the [Control Panel] from the start menu, then select [Appearance and Personalization] - [Adjust screen resolution] in the [Control Panel Home].

2Click the [Resolution] tab, and move the slider to select the resolution closest to the maximum output signal resolution of the projector.

3Click the [OK] button.

Screen Resolution Change the appearance of your display Display: 1.1CS-MF2228-1 Resolution: 1920 x 1000 (Recommended) Generators: Landscape Make text and other item/larger or smaller. What display settings should I choose? OK Cancel Apply

Change the appearance of your display Pages: 0.000x0.001# Resolution: 1280 x 1024 (recommended) Quantum: Landscape Advanced settings Have had and other items larger or smaller What display settings should I choose? OK Cancel Apply

Windows Vista

1 Open the [Control Panel] from the start menu, then select [Appearance and Personalization] - [Adjust screen resolution] in the [Control Panel Home].
2Under [Resolution], use the slider to select the resolution closest to the projector's maximum resolution.
3Click the [OK] button.

Display Settings Monitor Generic PoP Monitor on NVIDIA GeForce2 MX 100.00 (Microsoft Corporation * XPERM) Exclusions Low High 1020 for 1200 pixels Colors Highest (32 bits) Advanced Settings... OK Cancel Help

Windows XP

1 Right-click on the desktop background and select [Properties] to open the [Display Properties].
2Click the [Settings] tab, and under [Screen resolution], use the slider to select the resolution closest to the projector's maximum resolution.
3Click the [OK] button.

Display Properties Themes Desktop Screen Cover Appearance Settings Drag the monster icon to match the physical arrangement of your monsters 1 2 Displays 1. (Default Mounted on Install) 000456 Express Chaper Family Screen resolution More Less 1900 by 1300 pixels Color quality Highest (32 bit) On this device to the monster icons. Extend my Windows desktop onto this monster. Ident Enableboot Advanced OK Cancel Help

■ Mac OS X

1 Open the Apple Menu and select [System Preferences].
2In the [System Preferences] window, click the [Displays] icon to display the Display window.
3Select the [Display] tab and select the resolution closest to the maximum output signal resolution of the projector from the [Resolutions] list.
4Close the [System Preferences] window.

DLL 1703FP Show All Display Color Resolutions: 640 x 480 (stretched) 640 x 512 600 x 600 600 x 600 (stretched) 600 x 640 1024 x 768 1024 x 768 (stretched) 1024 x 820 1200 x 999 1820 x 1200 Colors: Millions Refresh Rate: 75 Hertz Detect Displays Show displays in menu bar

Auto PC Adjustment

If the image display is shifted or there is flickering of the screen when [Analog PC-1] or [Analog PC-2] is selected, press the AUTO PC button to adjust the projector to the optimal condition.

The adjustment results will be stored. If the projector is used again with the same computer, when the input signal is selected the image will be projected automatically under the same conditions that were previously adjusted.

■ Performing the Auto PC Function

Press the AUTO PC button to perform projector adjustment.

Remote control Projector POWER INPUT BLANK FREEZE AUTO PC ASPECT O/U 1 MENU/O/ALL AUTO PC INPUT POWER

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Performing the Auto PC Function - 2

If the Auto PC adjustment is insufficient, perform the following operations.

  • Select the input signal that matches the resolution of the computer from [Input signal select]. (P88)
  • If adjustment is insufficient even when using the above operation, adjust [Total dots], [Tracking], [Horizontal position], [Vertical position], [Horizontal pixels] and [Vertical pixels] in [Input signal settings]. (P89 - P91)
  • For the signal types supported by the projector, see the table on page 292.

Adjusting the Image Size (WUX450/WX520)

To adjust the image size, turn the lever on the projection lens. Change the projector installation position (P130) if your desired image is too large or too small to adjust it with the zoom function.

CANON XEED WX520 - Adjusting the Image Size (WUX450/WX520) - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a projector with a circular button and base mount (no text or symbols)

Adjusting the Image Position

Turn the lens shift dials to adjust the projected image vertically or horizontally. Called “lens shift,” this adjusts the projected image into position by moving the lens up, down, left, or right.

CANON XEED WX520 - Adjusting the Image Position - 1

- Instead of adjusting where the image is projected, you can also move the image itself. For details, refer to "Specifying Digital Image Shift" (P150).

- You can fine-tune the image position by turning the upper part of the upper lens shift dial or the lower part of the lower lens shift dial.

WUX450/WX520

Vertical lens shift dial (2) (1) (3) (4) Horizontal lens shift dial

(1) Turning upper lens shift dial clockwise:
(2) Turning upper lens shift dial counterclockwise:
(3) Turning lower lens shift dial clockwise:
(4) Turning lower lens shift dial counterclockwise:

For details on lens shift, refer to "Lens Shift Function" (P134).

Moves the image down.

Moves the image up.

Moves the image left.

Moves the image right.

■ WUX400ST/WX450ST

Vertical lens shift dial (2) (1) (3) (4) Horizontal lens shift dial

(1) Turning upper lens shift dial clockwise: Moves the image up.
(2) Turning upper lens shift dial counterclockwise: Moves the image down.
(3) Turning lower lens shift dial clockwise: Moves the image right.
(4) Turning lower lens shift dial counterclockwise: Moves the image left. For details on lens shift, refer to "Lens Shift Function" (P134).

Adjusting the Focus

To adjust the focus, turn the focus ring.

WUX450/WX520 WUX400ST/WX450ST
Focus adjustment Focus ring Focus adjustment Focus ring

CANON XEED WX520 - Adjusting the Focus - 2

On the WUX400ST/WX450ST, images will waver as you turn the focus ring. Hold the focus ring on top and bottom and turn it slowly as you adjust the focus.

Step 4 Select an Aspect Ratio (Screen Aspect) Matching the Screen

Select an optimum aspect ratio of the projected image (screen aspect) or an optimum screen mode (aspect) according to the aspect ratio of the screen, type of input image signal and so on for the projection to make best use of the screen size.

[Screen aspect] Select the same screen aspect ratio as the screen you are using.

[Aspect] In general, select [Auto].

You may need to change the setting depending on the resolution of the computer or other AV equipment connected. If the image is not projected with the desired aspect ratio, refer to “Relationship between Aspect and Screen Aspect” on page 287.

Selecting Screen Aspect

Select the correct aspect ratio for the screen which is used.

1 Press the MENU button to display the menu window.

Remote control Projector POWER INPUT BLANK FREEZE AUTO PC ASPECT o/1 1 MENU/oALL MENU + 10 OK VOL KEystone

Analog PC-1 Input: settings Aspect Auto Auto PC Input signal select 1900 x 1200 123.456Hz Input signal settings Split screen Off

2Press the [ ] 🔊 [ ] buttons to select the [Install settings] tab.

Remote control Projector OK OK OK EXIT OK +50 MENU 1 2 3 4 50 60 70 80 90 100

Analog PC-1 Install settings Positional lock Off Image flip H/V None Screen aspect 16:10 Keystone Horizontal-vertical keystone Digital image shift Professional settings Audio in terminal select Screen color Normal On screen Test pattern Off

3Select [Screen aspect] with the [ ] ▲ [ ] buttons, and then press the OK button.

Remote control Projector
OK EXIT OK OK EXIT OK OK MENU +Vol 1Vol KEYSTONE MENU OK EXIT

Analog PC-1 Positional lock Off Image flip H/V None Screen aspect 16:10 Keystone Horizontal-vertical keystone Digital image shift Professional settings Audio in terminal select Screen color Normal On screen Test pattern Off

4Use the [ ] / [ ] buttons to select the desired contents.

Remote control Projector
OK D4/4 D3/2 EXIT D3/3 MENU +Vg OK 1Vg KEystone KEystone

Analog PC-1 Positional lock Off Image flip H/V None Screen aspect ►16:10 Keystone 16:9 Digital image shift 4:3 Professional settings 16:9 D. image shift Audio in terminal select 4:3 D. image shift Screen color Normal On screen Test pattern Off

16:10

Select this when you use a screen with an aspect ratio of 16:10. Also select this screen aspect when projecting on a wall.

You can correct keystone distortion with this mode. (P68)

CANON XEED WX520 - 16:10 - 1

natural_image Black-and-white cityscape featuring a river with boats and historic buildings (no visible text or signage)

16:10 screen

16:9

Select this when you use a screen with an aspect ratio of 16:9.

You can correct keystone distortion with this mode. (P68)

CANON XEED WX520 - 16:9 - 1

natural_image Black-and-white cityscape featuring a river with boats and historic buildings (no visible text or signage)

16:9 screen

4:3

Select this when you use a screen with an aspect ratio of 4:3.

You can correct keystone distortion with this mode. (P68)

CANON XEED WX520 - 4:3 - 1

natural_image Black-and-white photo of a riverside town with historic buildings and a church in the background (no visible text or signage)

4:3 screen

Step 4 Select an Aspect Ratio (Screen Aspect) Matching the Screen

16:9 D. image shift

Select this when you use a screen with an aspect ratio of 16:9.

Keystone correction cannot be performed in this mode. However, it is possible to move the image up / down when projecting level.

For details about how to move the image, refer to page 63.

4:3 D. image shift

Select this when you use a screen with an aspect ratio of 4:3.

Keystone correction cannot be performed in this mode. However, it is possible to move the image left / right when projecting level.

For details about how to move the image, refer to page 64.

5Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button.

Moving Image with 16:9 D. Image Shift

This option applies image processing to reposition the image. For this reason, it is called digital image shift.

When the screen aspect is [16:9 D. image shift], press the MENU button to display the menu.

Projector MENU + Vol OK Vol KEystone

2Press the [ ] / [ ] buttons to select the [Install settings] tab.

Remote control Projector OK OK EXIT OK OK MENU +Vp 1p KEystone

Analog PC-1 Install settings Positional lock Off Image flip H/V None Screen aspect 16:9 D. image shift Keystone Horizontal–vertical keystone Digital image shift Professional settings Audio in terminal select Screen color Normal On screen Test pattern Off

3Use the [ ] ▲[ ] buttons to select [Digital image shift], then press the OK button.

Remote control Projector OK EXIT OK OK MENU +VOL 1VOL KEystone

Analog PC-1 Positional lock Off Image flip H/V None Screen aspect 16:9 D. image shift Keystone Horizontal–vertical keystone Digital image shift Professional settings Audio in terminal select Screen color Normal On screen Test pattern Off

Step 4 Select an Aspect Ratio (Screen Aspect) Matching the Screen

4Use the [ ] ▼[ ] buttons to move the image up or down.

Remote control Projector OK OK/4 OK/2 OK/3 EXIT MENU +Vp OK +Vp 1Vp KEystone

D.image shift adjustment +0

[▲button Moves the image up. Screen [▼button Moves the image down.

5When the image fits the screen, press the OK button.

Moving Image with 4:3 D. Image Shift

1 When the screen aspect is [4:3 D. image shift], press the MENU button to display the menu.

Projector MENU +½ OK 1½ KEystone

2Press the [ ] / [ ] buttons to select the [Install settings] tab.

Remote control Projector OK OK2/ 4 OK3/ 3 EXIT +VP +V OK +V V KEYSTONE MENU VE1 VE2

Analog PC-1 Positional lock Off Image flip H/V None Screen aspect 4:3 D. image shift Keystone Horizontal-vertical keystone Digital image shift Professional settings Audio in terminal select Screen color Normal On screen Test pattern Off

3Use the [ ] ▲[ ] buttons to select [Digital image shift], then press the OK button.

Remote control Projector
OK EXIT OK OK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 MENU +VOL OK 1 VOL KEYSTONE 1

Analog PC-1 Positional lock Off Image flip H/V None Screen aspect 4:3 D. image shift Keystone Horizontal-vertical keystone Digital image shift Professional settings Audio in terminal select Screen color Normal On screen Test pattern Off

4Use the [ ] / [ ] buttons to move the image.

Remote control Projector
OK EXIT OK +2 1/8 MENU KEYSTONE

D.image shift adjustment +0

[ ]button

[ ] button
Moves the image right.
Moves the image left.
CANON XEED WX520 - 4Use the [ ] / [ ] buttons to move the image. - 3

natural_image Three black-and-white photos showing a waterfront cityscape with buildings and boats, each before and after transformation (no text or symbols)

5When the image fits the screen, press the OK button.

Resetting the Image Shift

Perform the following steps to reset the image shift adjustment.

Access the [D. image shift adjustment] window and press the KEYSTONE button to display the [D. image shift reset] window.

Next, select [OK] with the [◀] button, and then press the OK button.

Selecting the Aspect

Select [Aspect] based on the input signal type, aspect ratio of the screen and resolution.

For more details about aspect ratios, refer to “Relationship between Aspect and Screen Aspect” on page 287.

Types of Aspect Ratios

Auto

An image is projected at the aspect ratio of the input signal. Select this mode for normal image projection.

16:10

The image is projected using an input signal aspect ratio of 16:10.

Select this if an image of 16:10 aspect ratio cannot be correctly projected in [Auto] mode.

16:9

The image is projected using an input signal aspect ratio of 16:9. Select this if an image of 16:9 aspect ratio cannot be correctly projected in [Auto] mode.

4:3

The image is projected using an input signal aspect ratio of 4:3. Select this if an image of 4:3 aspect ratio cannot be correctly projected in [Auto] mode.

Zoom

This cuts the upper/lower or left/right part of the screen according to the screen aspect and zooms in or out of the center of the image. Select this if a letter box is displayed (black lines at the top/bottom of the screen) when watching video.

CANON XEED WX520 - Zoom - 1

There may be some cases when this cannot be selected, depending on the input signal and/or resolution.

True size

The image is projected with the original resolution of the input signal. Select this option for clear projection of computer screens at up to maximum resolution.

CANON XEED WX520 - True size - 1

There may be some cases when this cannot be selected, depending on the input signal and/or resolution.

Selecting an Aspect Ratio

Press the ASPECT button on the remote control and select an appropriate aspect ratio. Press the ASPECT button to change the aspect ratio type.

For more details about aspect ratios, refer to "Relationship between Aspect and Screen Aspect" on page 287.

Remote control POWER INPUT BLANK FREEZE AUTO PC ASPECT 0-1/ 1 MENU diALL

CANON XEED WX520 - Selecting an Aspect Ratio - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Auto"] --> B["16:10"]
    B --> C["16:9"]
    C --> D["4:3"]
    D --> E["Zoom"]
    E --> F["True size"]

You can also select any aspect ratio from [Aspect] in the menu. (P87)

CANON XEED WX520 - Selecting an Aspect Ratio - 3

Some aspect ratios may not appear depending on the type of input signal.

Step 5 Correct the Image Distortion

Adjusting Keystone Distortion

To correct keystone distortion, press the KEYSTONE button.

Two types of correction are available: horizontal/vertical correction and corner correction.

Horizontal/vertical keystone correction adjusts image width and height, and corner correction adjusts the image relative to each corner.

For instructions on switching between the two types of keystone correction, refer to "Specifying Keystone Correction" (P150). Press the KEYSTONE button to correct distortion according to the selected keystone correction method.

CANON XEED WX520 - Adjusting Keystone Distortion - 1

  • Keystone can be adjusted within a range of approximately ± 20^ (WUX450/WX520) or approximately ± 12^ (WUX400ST/WX450ST). If the keystone distortion is too large to adjust, move the projector installation position so that it is completely straight.
  • The result of keystone adjustment is stored in memory. If you place the projector in the same position, the keystone adjustment is not necessary.
  • Signals are processed digitally when keystone distortion is corrected. The image may look different from the original one. In addition, the aspect ratio of the image may change.
  • Keystone correction may not be effective in some lens shift positions.
  • The digital image shift function (P63) is accessed when this button is pressed and the screen aspect is [4:3 D. image shift] or [16:9 D. image shift].

■ Horizontal/Vertical Keystone Correction

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Horizontal/Vertical Keystone Correction - 1

[Zoom] (P149) in the [Install settings] menu is not available during horizontal/vertical keystone correction (WUX400ST/WX450ST).

1Press either the KEYSTONE button on the remote control or the KEYSTONE button on the projector to display the window shown below.

Remote control Projector OK OK EXIT OK OK MENU +50 1 Vol. KEYSTONE

Horizontal–vertical keystone adjustment +0 +0

2Press the pointer buttons to adjust the dimensions.

Remote control Projector OK OK/2/ 4 OK/2/ 2 OK/2/ 3 EXIT OK OK MENU + vol 1 vol KEystone

[▲button

Reduces the dimensions of the upper edge.

CANON XEED WX520 - 2Press the pointer buttons to adjust the dimensions. - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["初始设置"] --> B["中间处理"]
    B --> C["最终输出"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333

CANON XEED WX520 - 2Press the pointer buttons to adjust the dimensions. - 3

CANON XEED WX520 - 2Press the pointer buttons to adjust the dimensions. - 4

flowchart
graph TD
    A["User Group 1"] --> C{Decision Node}
    B["User Group 2"] --> C
    C --> D["User Group 3"]
    C --> E["User Group 4"]
    C --> F["User Group 5"]
    D --> G["User Group 6"]
    E --> G
    F --> G
    G --> H["User Group 7"]
    H --> I["User Group 8"]
    I --> J["User Group 9"]
    J --> K["User Group 10"]

Screen

[▼button] Reduces the dimensions of the lower edge.

CANON XEED WX520 - 2Press the pointer buttons to adjust the dimensions. - 5

CANON XEED WX520 - 2Press the pointer buttons to adjust the dimensions. - 6

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Stage 1: Group 1"] --> B["Central Pie Chart"]
    C["Stage 2: Group 2"] --> B
    D["Group 1: Group 1"] --> E["Group 2: Group 2"]
    F["Group 2: Group 2"] --> E
    G["Group 1: Group 1"] --> H["Group 2: Group 2"]

CANON XEED WX520 - 2Press the pointer buttons to adjust the dimensions. - 7

CANON XEED WX520 - 2Press the pointer buttons to adjust the dimensions. - 8

flowchart
graph TD
    A["User Group"] --> B{Data Flow}
    B --> C["User Group 1"]
    B --> D["User Group 2"]
    B --> E["User Group 3"]
    C --> F["Final User"]
    D --> F
    E --> F

[▶button

Reduces the dimension of the right edge.

CANON XEED WX520 - 2Press the pointer buttons to adjust the dimensions. - 9

flowchart
graph TD
    A["User Group 1"] --> B["User Group 2"]
    B --> C["User Group 3"]
    C --> D["User Group 4"]
    D --> E["User Group 5"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

[ ]button

Reduces the dimension of the left edge.

3When keystone distortion has been corrected, press the OK button.

■ Corner Adjustment

1Press either the KEYSTONE button on the remote control or the KEYSTONE button on the projector in order to display the window shown below on the right.

Remote control Projector OK OK/4 OK/3 OK/1 OK/2 OK/3 EXIT MENU + / 2 OK 1 / 2 + / 2 KEYSTONE 1 / 2

Corner adjustment Choose corner to adjust.

2Press the pointer button of the corner for correction, and then press the OK button.

Remote control Projector OK OK EXIT MENU +VOL 1 VOL KEystone

Corner adjustment Choose corner to adjust.

3Press the pointer buttons to adjust the corner.

Remote control Projector OK EXIT OK OK +VOL 1 VOL MENU KEystone

Corner adjustment Use arrow keys to adjust.

4When you have finished correcting, press the OK button.

CANON XEED WX520 - 1Press either the KEYSTONE button on the remote control or the KEYSTONE button on the projector in order to display the window shown below on the right. - 7

Corner adjustment settings will be cleared if you subsequently use [Zoom] (P149) in the [Install settings] menu (WUX400ST/WX450ST).

■ Resetting the Keystone Adjustment

Perform the following steps to reset the keystone adjustment.

Press the KEYSTONE button twice to display the [Keystone reset] window. You can now reset the correction selected in the keystone setting.

Next, select [OK] with the [◀] button, and then press the OK button.

Horizontal-vertical keystone reset Horizontal-vertical keystone adjustment will be reset. OK? OK Cancel

Step 6 Select the Image Quality (Image Mode)

You can select an image mode to suit the projected image.

In each image mode, you can further adjust the brightness, contrast, sharpness, gamma, color adjustment, advanced adjustment, and lamp mode. (P97)

Image Modes

The image modes which can be selected vary somewhat depending on the selected input signal.

Image ModeCompatible input signalsExplanation
Digital PC Analog PC-1 / 2 HDMI (when [HDMI In] is [Computer]) LAN USBComponent HDMI (when [HDMI In] is [Auto])
StandardSuitable for projecting a computer screen or watching video in a brightish room. This image mode emphasizes white tones.
PresentationSuitable for viewing text-based images in a brightish room.
DynamicSuitable for watching video in a brightish room.
Photo/sRGBSuitable for viewing images from sRGB-compatible digital cameras or Blu-ray videos in a moderately dark room.Compatible with the sRGB color space.
VideoSuitable for watching video taken with a video camera in a moderately dark room.
User 1 - 5Up to 5 user-selected combinations of image quality settings can be stored in the memory. (P98) Stored settings can be selected as an image mode.

○: Compatible ÷ Not compatible

■ Selecting an Image Mode

Press the IMAGE button on the remote control to select.

The image mode changes each time the IMAGE button is pressed. (The displayed image modes vary depending on the selected input signal.)

Remote control 0.200M TEST PATTERN VOL IMAGE SPLIT MUTE GAMMA ECO Fn

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Selecting an Image Mode - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Standard"] --> B["Presentation"]
    B --> C["Photo/sRGB"]
    C --> D["User 1"]
    D --> A

You can also select any image mode from the [Image mode] menu. (P97)

- User settings 1 - 5 are displayed when the desired image settings have been created and stored using the user memory function in the image adjustment menu (P98).

Step 7 Set Power-Saving Settings

Press the ECO button on the remote control to complete power-saving settings. The following three settings are available.

- Lamp Settings

For changing lamp and fan power consumption in the current image mode.

- Auto Power-Off

A function for automatically turning the power off after a certain period if the projector is not used and there is no input signal.

• Network Standby Settings

Specify whether network functions should be active in standby mode.

1 Press the ECO button to display the window shown below.

Remote control 0.200M TEST PATTERN VOL IMAGE SPLIT MUTE GAMMA ECO Fn

Power saver settings Lamp mode Full power Auto power-off 15 min. Network standby settings

2Press the [] / [ ] buttons to select a menu.

Complete the setting for the selected function. For details, refer to the page describing each function.

  • Lamp Settings (P107)
    • Auto Power-Off (P110)
    • Network Standby Settings (P172)

Step 8 Turn the Projector Off

1 Press the POWER button to display the window shown below.

Remote control Projector POWER INPUT BLANK FREEZE AUTO PC ASPECT OH/ 1 MENU/chALL AUTO PC INPUT POWER

Push POWER button again to turn off power. After the power is turned off, the power cord can be unplugged even if the cooling fan is still running. OK

2When this window is displayed, press the POWER button again to turn off the power.

After you turn the power off, the projector will enter standby mode once it cools down.

CANON XEED WX520 - 2When this window is displayed, press the POWER button again to turn off the power. - 1

If you want to continue projecting without turning off the power, press a button other than POWER, or else wait until the confirmation message disappears.

CANON XEED WX520 - 2When this window is displayed, press the POWER button again to turn off the power. - 2

• After turning off the projector, wait at least 5 minutes before turning it on again. It may shorten the lamp life if you turn on the projector immediately after turning it off.
- Using the projector for a long time may shorten the life of the lamp and internal optical components.
- Unplug the projector if it will not be used for an extended period.

Useful Functions Available During a Presentation

Table of Contents

Safety Instructions

Before Use

Operation

Projecting an Image

Useful Functions Available During a Presentation

Setting Functions from Menus

Installation and Maintenance

Installation

Connecting to a Network

Maintenance

Networked Multi-Projection

Networked Multi-Projection Overview

Operation in Each Mode

Functions in All Modes

Appendix

Other Information

Index

Useful Presentation Functions

Temporarily Blacking Out an Image

Useful when:

  • You have finished the presentation.
  • You want to divert attendees' attention from the screen.

Remote control POWER INPUT BLANK FREEZE AUTO PC ASPECT o/1/ MENU_o/all

Press the BLANK button to black out the image.

Press the BLANK button again to show the image.

  • You can set the screen state while blacking out the image in the menu. (P109)
  • The lamp remains illuminated while the image is blacked out.

Freezing the Picture

Useful when:

  • You want to perform a computer operation which is irrelevant to the proceedings of the presentation.
  • You want to stop a moving image.

Remote control POWER INPUT BLANK FREEZE AUTO PC ASPECT CT1/ MENU/daALL

Press the FREEZE button to freeze the moving image. The projector shows the following icon.

CANON XEED WX520 - Useful when: - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["User Interaction"] --> B["Group Distribution"]
    B --> C["Video Production"]
    C --> D["Video Output"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

Screen

Press the FREEZE button again to return to the original display.

- It is also cancelled when the input signal is terminated.

Adjusting the Volume

Useful when:

- You want to adjust the volume level of the projector or external speakers.

Remote control
D200M TEST PATTERN VOL IMAGE BPLIT MUTE GAMMA ECO Fn

Press the VOL button. The following screen appears.

CANON XEED WX520 - Useful when: - 2

  • You can also adjust the volume level with the [▼/ [ ]▼buttons of the projector.
  • Adjust the volume or mute setting on the computer if the volume level is too low.
  • You can also adjust the volume level of the speakers connected via the audio output terminal.

Muting the Sound

Useful when:

  • You want to temporality mute unnecessary sound.
  • You want to immediately mute the sound.

Remote control
D200M TEST PATTERN VOL IMAGE SPLIT MUTE GAMMA ECO Fn

Press the MUTE button to mute the sound. The projector shows the following icon.

CANON XEED WX520 - Useful when: - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["User Group"] --> B{Device Status}
    B --> C["User Group 1"]
    B --> D["User Group 2"]
    B --> E["User Group 3"]
    C --> F["Device Indicator"]
    D --> F
    E --> F
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333

Screen

Press the MUTE button again to cancel the mute function.

- You can also mute the sound of the speakers connected via the audio output terminal.

Zooming an Image

Useful when:

  • Zooming in on an object such as a small graph during a presentation (up to 12x).
  • Focusing on the current subject.

Press the +D.ZOOM button to enlarge a part of the image. Press the

-D.ZOOM button to reduce the image size.

Remote control D.200M TEST PATTERN VOL IMAGE SPLIT MUTE GAMMA ECO Fn

CANON XEED WX520 - Useful when: - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Input"] --> B["Processing"]
    B --> C["Screen"]
    C --> D["Output"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

• The magnification appears on the screen.

You can move the enlarged area by using the [▲/ [ ]▼[ ] / [◀] buttons.

Remote control OK OK/4 OK/2 OK/3 EXIT

Projector MENU +/-/ -/+/ OK +/-/ -/+/ -/+/ -/+/ -/+/ -/+/

Screen

You can restore the original size of the image by pressing the OK button.

CANON XEED WX520 - Useful when: - 6

The D.ZOOM buttons work differently than [Zoom] in the WUX400ST/WX450ST [Install settings] menu (P149).

Projecting Images on a USB Flash Drive

Images stored on a USB flash drive in the projector can be projected as follows. You can select the images to project, or you can project images automatically, one after another. JPEG images up to 7000x7000 can be projected.

CANON XEED WX520 - Projecting Images on a USB Flash Drive - 1

  • USB flash drives with security features are not recognized by the projector and cannot be selected as the image source.
  • If the projector cannot mount the file system, the drive name is grayed out and the following icon is displayed. In this case, the USB flash drive cannot be used.

CANON XEED WX520 - Projecting Images on a USB Flash Drive - 2

USB1 USB CARD1

1 Insert the USB flash drive in the USB port.

CANON XEED WX520 - Insert the USB flash drive in the USB port. - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a computer monitor with ventilation slots and ports (no text or symbols)

Insert the USB flash drive directly into the projector's USB port. The USB flash drive will not be recognized if you connect it via a hub.

2Press the INPUT button.

Remote control Projector POWER INPUT BLANK FREEZE AUTO PC ASPECT ch1/ MENU/chALL AUTO PC INPUT POWER

Input HDMI Digital PC Analog PC-1 Analog PC-2 ∞ Component LAN USB USB

3Press the INPUT button repeatedly to select [USB].

JPEG files on the USB flash drive are now listed.

USB1 USB CARD1 1/1 Return file1.jpg file2.jpg file3.jpg file4.jpg file5.jpg file6.jpg file7.jpg file8.jpg file9.jpg

CANON XEED WX520 - 3Press the INPUT button repeatedly to select [USB]. - 2

  • If the USB flash drive contains multiple partitions, a screen is displayed for you to select the desired partition. Use the pointer buttons to select the partition, and then press the OK button. Files on the partition are now listed.
  • Enlargement with the D.ZOOM button and split-screen display are not available when [USB] is selected as the input signal.

4Use the pointer buttons to select a file, and then press the OK button to project the image.

Press the [▲/ [ ]▼buttons to select a file.

To view another page, press the [◀] / [ ] buttons (if other pages are available).

To navigate to a higher or lower folder, select a folder and press the OK button.

CANON XEED WX520 - 4Use the pointer buttons to select a file, and then press the OK button to project the image. - 1

Motion blur reduction is not available when projecting JPEG files on a USB flash drive. (P114)

Remote control Projector OK EXIT MENU + /pA OK 1 /pA KEystone

5Switch to other images as needed.

To switch to the previous image, press the [▲] button.

To switch to the next image, press the [▼] button.

To rotate images left 90°, press the [◀] button.

To rotate images right 90°, press the ▶ button.

6After projection is finished, remove the USB flash drive.

CANON XEED WX520 - 6After projection is finished, remove the USB flash drive. - 1

The projector can also play a slideshow of images on a USB flash drive automatically. (P94)

Split-Screen Display

Two input images can be projected side by side. This is split-screen display. When you activate split-screen display, the current image is shown on the left side, and the new image is shown at right. You can change the source of images shown on each side by pressing the INPUT button. However, you cannot specify the same input signal (terminal) as the source for both sides.

CANON XEED WX520 - Split-Screen Display - 1

  • Network and USB input cannot be combined with other types of input for split-screen display.
  • [Zoom] (P149) in the [Install settings] menu is not available in split-screen mode (WUX400ST/WX450ST).

1 Supply two signals to the projector.

2Press the SPLIT button on the remote control.

Remote control 0.200M TEST PATTERN VOL IMAGE SPLIT MUTE GAMMA ECO Fn

1 2

CANON XEED WX520 - 2Press the SPLIT button on the remote control. - 3

  • A number is displayed in the center of one image area. (1 applies to the left image and 2 to the right image.) The image labeled with a number has “control rights,” and the sound for that image will be played. This is also the image with control rights if you adjust [Image priority]. (P96)
  • The number is no longer displayed after a little while, but you can view it again by pressing the SPLIT button.
  • To exit split-screen display, press the EXIT button.
  • Split-screen display can also be accessed by selecting [Split screen] in the [Input settings] menu. (P95)
  • These functions cannot be adjusted in this mode: sharpness (P100), dynamic gamma (P103), and motion blur reduction (P114).
  • Some functions are not available, such as [Image flip H/V] (P146), [Screen aspect] (P148), [Keystone] (P150), and [Logo capture] (P108).
  • Image mode colors differ somewhat from those in single-image mode.

3 If or is displayed in the center of the image area, you can switch control to the other side by pressing the [ ]/ [ ] buttons on the remote control.

1 : 2

(Example of display in split-screen mode.)

4Press the INPUT button to select the input signal for the side with control rights.

The [Input] menu is displayed. To determine which side is currently under control, check the screen ID in orange in the upper right of the menu. The side without control rights is labeled with a white circle.

For details on selecting input signals, refer to "Selecting an Input Signal" (P54).

Side currently under control (input signal can be switched) Input HDMI Digital PC Analog PC-1 Analog PC-2 Component Current input signal of side with control rights Current input signal of side without control rights

To exit split-screen display, press the EXIT button on the remote control.

Setting Functions from Menus

Table of Contents

Safety Instructions

Before Use

Operation

Projecting an Image

Useful Functions Available During a Presentation

Setting Functions from Menus

Installation and Maintenance

Installation

Connecting to a Network

Maintenance

Networked Multi-Projection

Networked Multi-Projection Overview

Operation in Each Mode

Functions in All Modes

Appendix

Other Information

Index

Use the menus to set the operation of the projector in detail.

The menu screen is divided into 6 tabs as shown below.

[Install settings] tab This setting is used when installing the projector. [Image adjustment] tab You can adjust the image quality and colors according to your preference. [Input settings] tab You can set the type of signal or the method of projection of the images input. [System settings] tab You can set the operation of the projector. [Network settings] tab These settings are for when using the projector from a PC via a network. For the network settings, refer to "Connecting to a Network" (P167). [Information] tab You can check information about the signal types of the images projected and other information. Contents of menu Menu items

Input Signal Types for which a Menu Item is Displayed

Different menu items are displayed for different input signal types. In the following explanation of each menu item, the input signal type for which the menu item is displayed is indicated as follows:

○ Input signal for which the menu item is displayed
— Input signal for which the menu item is not displayed

HDMI Component-LAN Digital PC Analog-PC USB

Basic Menu Operations

1 Press the MENU button to display the menu window.

Remote control Projector POWER INPUT BLANK FREEZE AUTO PC ASPECT ch/1 MENU/chAll MENU + ½ OK 1½ KEYSTONE

Input settings Aspect Auto Auto PC Input signal select 1900 x 1200 123.456Hz Input signal settings Split screen Off

2Press the [ ] /[ ] buttons to select a tab.

Remote control Projector OK OK/2 OK/4 OK/3 EXIT OK OK/1 OK/2 OK/3 MENU +VOL +VOL 1VOL KEystone

Analog PC-1 Image adjustment Image mode Presentation Create profile Brightness * —— +0 Contrast +0 Sharpness +2 Gamma +0 Color adjustment Advanced adjustment Lamp mode Full power Reset

- If the tab position is not highlighted in orange, press the [ ]/ [ ] buttons to move the current selection to the top.

3Press the [ ] ▲ [ ] buttons to select an item.

Remote control Projector OK EXIT OK OK MENU + vol + vol 1 vol KEystone

Analog PC-1 Image adjustment Image mode Presentation Create profile Brightness +0 Contrast +0 Sharpness +2 Gamma +0 Color adjustment Advanced adjustment Lamp mode Full power Reset

4Select contents.

How to select the contents varies depending on the item.

Selecting from a list Example: Aspect (P87)

Analog PC-1 Input settings Aspect ▶ Auto Auto PC 16:10 Input signal select 16:9 Input signal settings 4:3 Split screen True size

  1. Select [Aspect].
  2. Press the OK button or [ ] button to display a list of the contents.
  3. Use the [ ] ▼ [ ] Buttons to select the desired contents.
  4. When you have found the contents you desired, press the OK button or [▶].

Adjusting with the [ ]/ [ ]buttons

Analog PC-1 Image adjustment Image mode Presentation Create profile Brightness +0 Contrast +0 Sharpness +2 Gamma +0 Color adjustment Advanced adjustment Lamp mode Full power Reset

Example: Contrast (P99)

  1. Select [Contrast].
  2. Use the []◀[]▶buttons to adjust the setting.

Selecting from a different screen (1)

Menu position Use the painter button to set menu position. Press OK to close.

Example: Menu position (P154)

  1. Select [Menu position].
  2. Press the OK button to display a different screen.
  3. Then follow the instruction on the screen.

Selecting from a different screen (2)

Input signal settings Total dots 1904 Tracking 32 Horizontal position 376 Vertical position 31 Horizontal pixels 1440 Vertical pixels 900

Example: Tracking (P89)

  1. Select [Input signal settings].
  2. Press the OK button to display a different screen.
  3. Select [Tracking].
  4. Use the [ ]/ [ ] buttons to select the setting, then use the [ ] / [ ] buttons to select the value.
  5. When you have completed the settings, press the OK button.

5Pressing the MENU button causes the menu screen to disappear. The menu screen will also disappear if the EXIT button is pressed.

Setting Display Status (Input Settings)

Selecting the Aspect

CANON XEED WX520 - Selecting the Aspect - 1

[Input settings] > [Aspect]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB ○

You can select a projection mode corresponding to the aspect ratio of the image. (P66)

Analog PC-1 Input settings Aspect Auto PC 16:10 Input signal select 16:9 Input signal settings 4:3 Split screen True size

  • For LAN and USB input, [Auto] is selected automatically.
  • Different contents are displayed for different screen aspects or input signal types.
  • The ASPECT button on the remote control can also be used to select the [Aspect] settings.

Auto An image is projected at the aspect ratio of the input signal. Select this mode for normal image projection.

16:10 The image is projected using an input signal aspect ratio of 16:10.

CANON XEED WX520 - Selecting the Aspect - 3

- There may be some cases when this cannot be selected, depending on the input signal and/or resolution.

16:9 The image is projected using an input signal aspect ratio of 16:9. Select this if an image of 16:9 aspect ratio cannot be correctly projected in [Auto] mode.

4:3 The image is projected using an input signal aspect ratio of 4:3. Select this if an image of 4:3 aspect ratio cannot be correctly projected in [Auto] mode.

Zoom This cuts the upper/lower or left/right part of the screen according to the screen aspect and zooms in or out of the center of the image. Select this if a letter box is displayed (black lines at the top/bottom of the screen) when watching video.

CANON XEED WX520 - Selecting the Aspect - 4

- There may be some cases when this cannot be selected, depending on the input signal and/or resolution.

True size The image is projected with the original resolution of the input signal. Select this for clear projection of computer screens at up to WUXGA (WUX450/WUX400ST) or WXGA+ (WX520/WX450ST) resolution.

CANON XEED WX520 - Selecting the Aspect - 5

• There may be some cases when this cannot be selected, depending on the input signal and/or resolution.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

Setup Using Auto PC

MENU > [Input settings] > [Auto PC]

- HDMI Component LAN - Digital PC Analog PC USB

Automatically adjusts display position misalignment and screen flickering. The adjusted result is stored in the memory.

Analog PC-1 Aspect Auto Auto PC Input signal select 1900 × 1200 60.0000Hz Input signal settings Split screen Off

Press the OK button to accept your setting.

CANON XEED WX520 - Setup Using Auto PC - 2

If the Auto PC adjustment is insufficient, perform the following operations.

  • Select the input signal that matches the resolution of the computer from [Input signal select]. (P88)
  • If adjustment is insufficient even when using the above operation, adjust [Total dots], [Tracking], [Horizontal/Vertical position] and [Horizontal/Vertical pixels] in [Input signal settings]. (P89 - P91)
  • For the signal types supported by the projector, see the table on page 292.

Selecting an Input Signal

MENU > [Input settings] > [Input signal select]

- HDMI Component LAN - Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can select a suitable resolution if the auto PC adjustment function (P57) cannot project the correct image from a computer.

Analog PC-1 Input settings Aspect Auto Auto PC Input signal select ►1900 × 1200 60.000Hz Input signal settings 1400 × 1050 60.000Hz Split screen 1280 × 800 60.000Hz

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

Select an input signal corresponding to the resolution of the computer.

- For the signal types supported by the projector, see the table on page 292.

Adjusting the Input Signal

(Total dots)

MENU > [Input settings] > [Input signal settings] > [Total dots]

— HDMI Component LAN
— Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can adjust the total number of dots in the horizontal direction. Adjust it when stripes are displayed on the screen.

Input signal settings
Total dots1904
Tracking32
Horizontal position376
Vertical position31
Horizontal pixels1440
Vertical pixels900

Use the [◀/ [ ]buttons to select a value.

When you have completed the adjustment, press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

- Perform this adjustment if the Auto PC function (P57) cannot adjust the projected image correctly.

Adjusting the Input Signal

(Tracking)

MENU > [Input settings] > [Input signal settings] > [Tracking]

- HDMI Component LAN-
- Digital PC Analog PC USB-

You can fine-tune the timing for generating an image from the image signal.

Adjusts the tracking when the image distorts or flickers.

Input signal settings
Total dots1904
Tracking32
Horizontal position376
Vertical position31
Horizontal pixels1440
Vertical pixels900

Use the [ ]/ [ ] buttons to select a value.

When you have completed the adjustment, press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

- Perform this adjustment if the Auto PC function (P57) cannot adjust the projected image correctly.

Adjusting the Input Signal

(Horizontal position)

CANON XEED WX520 - (Horizontal position) - 1

[Input settings] > [Input signal settings] > [Horizontal position]

— HDMI Component LAN
— Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can adjust the horizontal position of the screen when the projected image is shifted in the horizontal direction.

Input signal settings
Total dots1904
Tracking32
Horizontal position376
Vertical position31
Horizontal pixels1440
Vertical pixels900

Use the [◀/ [ ]buttons to select a value. As the value increases, the screen moves to the left.

CANON XEED WX520 - (Horizontal position) - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Panel 1"] --> B["Group 1"]
    A --> C["Group 2"]
    A --> D["Group 3"]
    B --> E["User Group 1"]
    C --> F["User Group 2"]
    D --> G["User Group 3"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

When you have completed the adjustment, press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

- Perform this adjustment if the Auto PC function (P57) cannot adjust the projected image correctly.

Adjusting the Input Signal

(Vertical Position)

CANON XEED WX520 - (Vertical Position) - 1

[Input settings] > [Input signal settings] > [Vertical position]

- HDMI Component LAN-
- Digital PC Analog PC USB-

You can adjust the vertical position of the screen when the projected image is shifted in the vertical direction.

Input signal settings
Total dots1904
Tracking32
Horizontal position376
Vertical position31
Horizontal pixels1440
Vertical pixels900

Use the [ ]/ [ ] buttons to select a value. As the value increases, the screen moves upward.

Screen

When you have completed the adjustment, press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

- Perform this adjustment if the Auto PC function (P57) cannot adjust the projected image correctly.

Adjusting the Input Signal

(Horizontal pixels)

CANON XEED WX520 - (Horizontal pixels) - 1

[Input settings] > [Input signal settings] > [Horizontal pixels]

— HDMI Component LAN
— Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can adjust the number of the pixels in the horizontal direction if the length of the screen is too long or too short in the horizontal direction.

Input signal settings
Total dots1904
Tracking32
Horizontal position376
Vertical position31
Horizontal pixels1440
Vertical pixels900

Use the [◀/ [ ]▶buttons to select a value.

Screen

When you have completed the adjustment, press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

- Perform this adjustment if the Auto PC function (P57) cannot adjust the projected image correctly.

Adjusting the Input Signal

(Vertical pixels)

CANON XEED WX520 - (Vertical pixels) - 1

[Input settings] > [Input signal settings] > [Vertical pixels]

- HDMI Component LAN-
- Digital PC Analog PC USB-

You can adjust the number of the pixels in the vertical direction if the screen is too long or too short in the vertical direction.

Input signal settings
Total dots1904
Tracking32
Horizontal position376
Vertical position31
Horizontal pixels1440
Vertical pixels900

Use the [◀/ [ ]buttons to select a value.

Screen

When you have completed the adjustment, press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

- Perform this adjustment if the Auto PC function (P57) cannot adjust the projected image correctly.

Adjusting HDMI Input Level

MENU > [Input settings] > [HDMI input level]

○ HDMI Component LAN — — Digital PC Analog PC USB —

You can select this as required when you project visual software using an HDMI signal.

HDMI Aspect Auto HDMI input level ▶ Auto HDMI color space Normal HDMI over scan Expanded Progressive Split screen Off

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• [Auto] is the factory default.
- You can select this only when the type of signal sent from AV equipment is RGB.
- The signal level is selected automatically in [Auto] mode. (Some AV equipment may not support this.)
- If the HDMI output of your AV equipment allows switching between [Normal] and [Expanded], we recommend you to set [Expanded]. The contrast of images will be improved and dark scenes will be rendered more realistically. In this case, select [Auto] or [Expanded] for [HDMI input level].
For more detailed information, refer to the user's manual for the AV equipment connected to the projector.

Setting the HDMI Color Format

MENU > [Input settings] > [HDMI color space]

○ HDMI Component LAN — — Digital PC Analog PC USB —

Select the color space for the HDMI signal.

HDMI Aspect Auto HDMI input level Auto HDMI color space ▶ Auto HDMI over scan RGB Progressive YCbCr Split screen Off

Auto Selects the optimal color format for the input HDMI signal.

RGB Forces the projector to handle the input signal as an RGB signal.

YCbCr Forces the projector to handle the input signal as a color difference signal.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• [Auto] is the factory default.

Specifying HDMI Overscan

MENU > [Input settings] > [HDMI over scan]

○ HDMI Component LAN — — Digital PC Analog PC USB —

When projecting images in videos via HDMI, select this setting to trim distorted image edges.

HDMI Aspect Auto HDMI input level Auto HDMI color space Auto HDMI over scan ▶ Off Progressive On Split screen Off

Off The entire input signal (100%) is projected.

The images projected may be smaller than the full projection screen.

On Images are projected with distortion at the peripheral section of images trimmed off. (The central 95% of the image is projected.)

Note that image edges are trimmed away, based on resolution. In such a case, select [Off].

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

- The factory defaults settings are [On] when [HDMI In] (P115) is set for [Auto] and [Off] when it is set for [Computer].

Specifying Progressive Processing

MENU > [Input settings] > [Progressive]

○ HDMI Component LAN — — Digital PC Analog PC USB —

Performs progressive processing optimized for still images in cinematic content or moving images in videos.

HDMI Aspect Auto HDMI input level Auto HDMI color space Auto HDMI over scan Off Progressive Off Split screen ► Film/auto Video 1 Video 2 25p/30p(PsF)

Off Does not perform progressive processing.

Film/auto Suitable for still images or typical moving images. Performs progressive processing for video or cinematic content.

Video 1 Suitable for projecting video with high image quality and relatively slow movement. Performs progressive processing optimized for HD video.

Video 2 Suitable for projecting video with faster movement. Performs progressive processing optimized for fast-moving video.

25p/30p(PsF) Performs progressive processing optimized for 1080 PsF/25 or 1080PsF/30 video (25 or 30 fps, respectively).

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

Setting Display Status (Input Settings)

• [Film/auto] is the factory default.
- Select [Off] when flickers and horizontal lines are noticeable in media that has a lot of fast-moving action.
- Not available during split-screen display.

Specifying the Slideshow Interval

MENU > [Input settings] > [Slideshow Interval]

- HDMI Component LAN - Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can project images on a USB flash drive automatically, one after another.

USB Aspect Auto Slideshow interval --;--

Use the [W/[]buttons to select the interval for switching images (min.:sec.).

USB Input settings Aspect Auto Slideshow interval 00:20

Press the MENU button or EXIT button.

- The factory default is [--:--], which does not switch images automatically.

Specifying Split- Screen Display

MENU > [Input settings] > [Split screen]

○ HDMI Component LAN —

○ Digital PC Analog PC USB —

You can project two input images side by side. (P81)

Analog PC-1 Input settings Aspect Auto Auto PC Input signal select 1900 x 1200 123.45GHz Input signal settings Split screen Off On Settings

Off Exit split-screen mode.

On Activates split-screen mode.

Settings Split Off Specify whether to screen ____ use split-screen On display.

CANON XEED WX520 - You can project two input images side by side. (P81) - 2

Control rights Left screen Select the image to control. Right screen

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button. The image under your control is labeled with a split-screen icon.

• [Off] is the factory default.
- The SPLIT button on the remote control can also be used to select the [Split screen] settings.
- If or is displayed in the center of the image area, switch control to the other side by pressing the [ ] [ ] buttons on the remote control.
- When you switch to split-screen display, a dialog box indicates the left and right signals and input status.

Adjusting Image Quality (Image Adjustment)

Specifying Image Priority in Split-Screen Mode

MENU > [Image adjustment] > [Image priority]

○ HDMI Component LAN —
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB —

Some image processing in split-screen mode is applied to both sides. Here, select which side to use as the primary side, which will be the basis for secondary-side processing.

Analog PC-1 Image adjustment Image priority Primary Secondary Image mode Brightness +0 2 Contrast +0 2 Sharpness Gamma +0 2 Color adjustment Advanced adjustment Lamp mode Full power Reset

Primary Selecting [Primary] will prevent you from reverting to [Secondary]. Switch control to the other side, and then select [Primary] again.

Secondary Sets the current side (with control rights) as the secondary side.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

Some image adjustment settings in split-screen mode apply to the left and right sides independently. For others, the setting for the [Primary] side is also applied to the [Secondary] side.

Can be independently configured

Brightness (P99), Contrast (P99), Gamma (P100), Color adjustment (P101), Fine-Tune Gamma (P105)

[Primary] setting also applies to [Secondary]

Image Mode (P97), Advanced adjustment (except Fine-Tune Gamma) (P102-P106), Lamp mode (P107)

Specifying the Image Mode

MENU > [Image adjustment] > [Image mode]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can select an image mode (P71) suitable for the projected image. You can also select it with the IMAGE button on the remote control. (P72)

Analog PC-2 Image adjustment Image mode Create profile Brightness Contrast Sharpness Gamma Color adjustment Advanced adjustment Lamp mode Reset Standard Presentation Photo/sRGB User 1 User 2 User 3 User 4 User 5 Full power

Standard Suitable for projecting a computer screen or watching video in a brightish room. This image mode emphasizes white tones.

Presentation Suitable for viewing text-based images in a brightish room.
Dynamic Suitable for watching video in a brightish room.

Video Suitable for watching video taken with a video camera in a moderately dark room.

Photo/sRGB Suitable for projecting images taken with a digital camera that supports sRGB in a moderately dark room. Compatible with the sRGB color space.

User 1–5 Up to 5 user-selected combinations of image quality settings can be stored in the memory. (P98) Stored settings can be selected as an image mode.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

  • [Standard] is the factory default for Analog PC-1 or 2, Digital PC, or HDMI (when [HDMI In] is [Computer]), LAN or USB, and [Photo/sRGB] is the default for HDMI (when [HDMI In] is [Auto]) or Component.
  • You can adjust the image quality by adjusting the following items in each image mode: [Brightness], [Contrast], [Sharpness], [Gamma], [Color adjustment], [Advanced adjustment] and [Lamp mode]
  • The adjustment you have made is stored as each combination of input signals and an image mode.
  • When a user memory that was saved in [Create profile] is selected, [Baseline image mode] appears in the menu. This indicates the image mode that was the base when the user memory was saved.

Analog PC-2 Image adjustment Image mode Presentation Create profile Brightness +0 Contrast +0 Sharpness +2 Gamma +0 Color adjustment Advanced adjustment Lamp mode Full power Reset

Analog PC-1 Image adjustment Image mode User 1 Core profile Baseline image mode Presentation Originals +0 Contrast +0 Sharpness +2 Gamma +0 Color adjustment Advanced adjustment Lamp mode Full power Reset

Creating/Saving a User Profile

CANON XEED WX520 - Creating/Saving a User Profile - 1

[Image adjustment] > [Create profile]

○ HDMI Component LAN-
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB-

Up to 5 combinations of image quality settings can be stored. The stored image quality can be selected as an image mode.

Analog PC-2 Image adjustment Image mode Presentation Create profile Brightness +0 Contrast +0 Sharpness +2 Gamma +0 Color adjustment Advanced adjustment Lamp mode Full power Reset

Use the [▲/ [ ]▼buttons and select the save destination. (Saved memories are indicated by checkmarks.)

Create profile Copying the image mode. Specify destination. User 1 User 2 User 3 User 4 User 5 Return

When the desired save destination is selected, press the OK button to accept your setting and then press [Return].

- The saved settings consist of the brightness, contrast, sharpness, gamma, color adjustment, advanced adjustment, and lamp mode.

- The number of displayed user memories is 5, however it is possible to save different settings for when the connected equipment is a computer (ANALOG PC, DIGITAL PC or HDMI (when [HDMI In] (P115) is [Computer]) and when AV equipment is connected (COMPONENT, HDMI (when [HDMI In] (P115) is [Auto])). As a result, it is possible to save up to 10 settings.

- The image mode name which was the basis for the settings change is also saved in the user memory. When a user memory is selected as the image mode, the image mode that was the base for that user memory is displayed in the menu as [Baseline image mode].

Adjusting Brightness

MENU > [Image adjustment] > [Brightness]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○

○ Digital PC Analog PC USB ○

You can adjust the brightness of images.

Analog PC-2 Image adjustment Image mode Create profile Brightness Contrast Sharpness Gamma Color adjustment Advanced adjustment Lamp mode Reset Presentation +0 +0 +2 +0 Full power

[▶] Increases the brightness of an image.

[Decreases the brightness of an image.

When you have completed the adjustment, press the MENU or EXIT button.

- The adjustments you have made are stored as adjusted values for the input signals and image mode of the current projection.

Adjusting Contrast

MENU > [Image adjustment] > [Contrast]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○

Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can adjust the contrast of images.

Adjust the difference between the light and dark parts of the image to produce an image with emphasized contrast or an image that is soft.

Analog PC-1 Image adjustment Image mode Presentation Create profile Brightness +0 Contrast +0 Sharpness +2 Gamma +0 Color adjustment Advanced adjustment Lamp mode Full power Reset

[▶] Increases the contrast of an image. This emphasizes the darker and brighter parts of the image on the projected image.

[Decreases the contrast of an image. The image becomes less vivid.

When you have completed the adjustment, press the MENU or EXIT button.

• The adjustments you have made are stored as adjusted values for the input signals and image mode of the current projection.

Adjusting Sharpness

MENU > [Image adjustment] > [Sharpness]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB ○

You can adjust the sharpness of images.

Analog PC-2 Image adjustment Image mode Presentation Create profile Brightness +0 Contrast +0 Sharpness +2 Gamma +0 Color adjustment Advanced adjustment Lamp mode Full power Reset

[▶] Increases the sharpness of an image.

[Decreases the sharpness of an image.

When you have completed the adjustment, press the MENU or EXIT button.

- The adjustments you have made are stored as adjusted values for the input signals and image mode of the current projection.

Correcting Gamma

MENU > [Image adjustment] > [Gamma]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can correct portions of an image that are difficult to see because they are too dark or bright.

Gamma can be corrected using the GAMMA button on the remote control.

Analog PC-2 Image adjustment Image mode Presentation Create profile Brightness +0 Contrast +0 Sharpness +2 Gamma +0 Color adjustment Advanced adjustment Lamp mode Full power Reset

[▶Brightens the dark portion.
[ ] Darkens the bright portion.

When you have completed the adjustment, press the MENU or EXIT button.

  • The adjustments you have made are stored as adjusted values for the input signals and image mode of the current projection.
  • More detailed adjustment is possible by using the detailed gamma correction (P105).

Adjusting Colors

CANON XEED WX520 - Adjusting Colors - 1

[Image adjustment] > [Color adjustment]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can adjust the color depth and hue of images for each primary color, red, green and blue. The color temperature can also be adjusted.

Color adjustment Color level Color balance Color temperature R Gain G Gain B Gain R Offset G Offset B Offset Return

Color level Adjusts the intensity of colors.

[▶] Increases the intensity of color.
[Decreases the intensity of color.

Color balance Adjusts the color balance of a purplish or greenish image.

[ ] Corrects a purplish image.
[ ]Corrects a greenish image.

Color temperature Adjusts the color temperature of the image.

Changes to a bluish color (cold color).
[ ]Changes to a reddish color (warm color).

R / G / B Adjusts the intensity of each Gain color.

[ ] Increases the color intensity.
[Decreases the color intensity.

R / G / B Adjusts the color Offset reproducibility of dark portions of each color.

[▶] Increases the color reproducibility.
[Decreases the color reproducibility.

When you have completed the adjustment, press the MENU or EXIT button.

- The adjustments you have made are stored as adjusted values for the input signals and image mode of the current projection.

Adjusting to the Ambient Light

(Ambient Light)

CANON XEED WX520 - (Ambient Light) - 1

[Image adjustment] > [Advanced adjustment] > [Ambient light]

○ HDMI Component LAN —
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB —

You can correct and more effectively project an image according to the ambient light on the screen. The [Ambient light] setting is available in Photo/sRGB image mode (P97).

Advanced adjustment Ambient light ▶ Off Noise reduction ▶ Adjust Dynamic gamma ▶ Off Mem. color correct 6-axis color adjust ▶ Off Fine-Tune Gamma Iris ▶ Off Return

Off Projects an image with no correction.

Adjust You can specify the type and level (brightness) of the ambient light.

Ambient light Type Fluorescent Level H Return

Type Tungsten

Select this if the ambient light source is a light bulb or bulb color fluorescent. Fluorescent

Select this if the ambient light source is a day white fluorescent.

Ambient light Type Tungsten Level Fluorescent Return

Level L Select this if the ambient light is normal. H Select this if the ambient light is high (bright).

Ambient light Type Fluorescent Level L Return H

Examples of Ambient Light Level Settings

LevelExample Location
L Projection room, sports bar, etc.
H Conference room, lecture room

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• [Off] is the factory default.

Reducing Image Noise

(Noise reduction)

CANON XEED WX520 - (Noise reduction) - 1

[Image adjustment] > [Advanced adjustment] > [Noise reduction]

○ HDMI Component LAN
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can reduce image noise.

Advanced adjustment Noise reduction ▶ Off Dynamic gamma Weak Mem. color correct Middle 6-axis color adjust Strong Fine-Tune Gamma Iris Off Return

Off Disables noise reduction.

WeakSpecifies the intensity of the noise reduction in three steps.
Middle
Strong

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

  • The factory default for HDMI (when [HDMI In] (P115) is set to [Auto]) is [Off] and when Component is used, it is set to [Weak].
  • Image resolution may seem lower when noise reduction is applied.
  • Select [Weak] for fast-moving images. Select [Strong] for slow-moving images.
  • The adjustment you have made is stored as adjusted values for the input signals and image mode of the current projection.
  • When [HDMI In] (P115) is [Computer], this setting is not displayed.

Dynamic Gamma Adjustment

CANON XEED WX520 - Dynamic Gamma Adjustment - 1

[Image adjustment] > [Advanced adjustment] > [Dynamic gamma]

○ HDMI Component LAN
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can adjust the gradation representation of light and dark portions of an image automatically.

Advanced adjustment Noise reduction Off Dynamic gamma ▶ Off Mem. color correct Weak 6-axis color adjust Middle Fine-Tune Gamma Strong Iris Off Return

Off Dynamic gamma is disabled.

WeakSpecifies the intensity of the
Middledynamic gamma in three steps.
Strong

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

  • The factory default settings are [Off] when the connected equipment is a Computer (ANALOG PC, DIGITAL PC, HDMI (when [HDMI In] (P115) is [Computer])) and [Weak] when the connected equipment is AV equipment (COMPONENT, HDMI (when [HDMI In] (P115) is [Auto])).
  • The adjustments you have made are stored as adjusted values for the input signals and image mode of the current projection.

Correcting Memory Color

CANON XEED WX520 - Correcting Memory Color - 1

[Image adjustment] > [Advanced adjustment] > [Mem. color correct]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

Enhances skin tones, blue skies, and greens, so that these colors are more consistent with people's remembered impressions.

Mem. color correct
FleshOff
SkyOff
GreenOff
Return

Flesh Specifies the intensity of Sky enhancement: [Off], [Weak], Green [Middle], or [Strong]. Set to [Off] to disable enhancement.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

  • The factory default settings are as follows.
  • For HDMI (when [HDMI In] (P115) is set to [Computer]), Digital PC, Analog PC, USB, or LAN, the default setting is [Off].
  • For HDMI (when [HDMI In] (P115) is set to [Auto]) and Component, the default setting is [Weak], regardless of the image mode.
  • The adjustments you have made are stored as adjusted values for the input signals and image mode of the current projection.

Fine-Tuning Colors (6-axis Color Adjustment)

CANON XEED WX520 - Fine-Tuning Colors (6-axis Color Adjustment) - 1

[Image adjustment] > [Advanced adjustment] > [6-axis color adjust]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can make fine adjustments to the image colors with RGB (red, green, blue) and CMY (cyan, magenta, yellow).

Advanced adjustment Noise reduction Off Dynamic gamma Off Mem. color correct 6-axis color adjust ▶ Off Fine-Tune Gamma Adjust Iris Reset Return

Off Disables 6-axis color adjustment.

If you select [Adjust], the previous setting of 6-axis color adjustment becomes active again.

Adjust Enables 6-axis color adjustment.

CANON XEED WX520 - Fine-Tuning Colors (6-axis Color Adjustment) - 3

Use the [▲/ [ ] Buttons to select [Hue], [Saturation], or [* Brightness], then adjust them with the [◀/ [ ] buttons. When color adjustments are completed, press the OK button.

Reset Returns all adjustment values to zero.

When you have completed the adjustment, press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• [Off] is the factory default.
• The adjustments you have made are stored as adjusted values for the input signals and image mode of the current projection.
- Adjustment is not shown on the projected menu screen itself.

Fine-Tuning Gamma

MENU > [Image adjustment] > [Advanced adjustment] > [Fine-Tune Gamma]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

The four gamma curves (white, red, green, blue) can be adjusted. Red, green, and blue can be adjusted separately. Adjustments to white are also applied to the three other colors. Note that adjusting any color will overwrite previous adjustments.

Advanced adjustment Noise reduction Off Dynamic gamma Off Mem. color correct 6-axis color adjust Off Fine-Tune Gamma Iris Off Return

Select [Fine-Tune Gamma] then press the OK button. The following [Fine-Tune Gamma] screen for confirmation appears.

CANON XEED WX520 - Fine-Tuning Gamma - 2

line Fine-Tune Gamma | X-axis | Y-axis | |---|---| | 0 | 0 | | 512 | 512 | | 1024 | 1024 | Legend: - White - Red - Green - Blue - Reset - Return The chart displays a single green data point connected by a diagonal line from bottom-left to top-right, indicating a positive linear trend across the coordinate space.

Use the [√] [ ] buttons to select the color, then press the OK button. Next, use the [√] [ ] buttons to select a point on the gamma curve, and use the [√] [ ] buttons to adjust the position of the point. When you have completed the adjustment, press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• The adjustments you have made are stored as adjusted values for the input signals and image mode of the current projection.
- For details of gamma correction, refer to page 100.
- RGB offset (relative to 0) can be adjusted by using the R/G/B Offset function ("Adjusting Colors" (P101)).
- Adjustment is not applied to the projected menu itself. Perform adjustment using input signals or a built-in test pattern.

Controlling Contrast (Iris)

MENU > [Image adjustment] > [Advanced adjustment] > [Iris]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can control image contrast by opening or closing the iris.

Advanced adjustment Noise reduction Off Dynamic gamma Off Mem. color correct 6-axis color adjust Off Fine-Tune Gamma Iris ▶ Off Return On

Off Keeps the iris fully open. Emphasizes brightness over contrast.

On Keeps the iris halfway open. Emphasizes contrast over brightness.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• [Off] is the factory default.
- The adjustment you have made is stored as adjusted values for the input signals and image mode of the current projection.

Specifying the Lamp Mode

MENU > [Image adjustment] > [Lamp mode]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○

○ Digital PC Analog PC USB ○

Reducing the lamp brightness reduces power consumption and cooling fan noise.

You can access the [Lamp mode] menu by pressing the ECO button on the remote control.

Analog PC-1 Image adjustment Image mode Presentation Create profile Brightness +0 Contrast +0 Sharpness +2 Gamma +0 Color adjustment Advanced adjustment Lamp mode ▶ Full power Reset Power saver

Full projects images at full power brightness.

Power saver Reduces lamp brightness to save energy.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• The factory default is [Full power].
- The adjustment you have made is stored as adjusted values for the input signals and image mode of the current projection.

Resetting Image Adjustment Settings

MENU > [Image adjustment] > [Reset]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○

○ Digital PC Analog PC USB ○

You can reset the current image adjustment settings to the default settings. If reset is performed when user setting 1–5 is selected for [Image mode], the settings are returned to the settings that were saved in [User 1–5].

Image mode reset Image mode will be reset to default. OK? OK Cancel

OK Resets the image adjustment settings.

Cancel Cancels resetting of the image adjustment settings.

- Only the setting for the combination of input signal and image mode for the current projection is reset.

Customizing System Operation (System Settings)

Registering User Logos

CANON XEED WX520 - Registering User Logos - 1

[System settings] > [User screen settings] > [Logo capture]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

Registers the current image as a user logo. Registered user logos can be shown when no signal is received, when the BLANK button is pressed, or as the startup image.

User screen settings Logo capture Logo position Center No signal screen Blue Screen when blank Black Projector on Canon logo Return

This captures the image in the frame as a logo. OK Cancel

OK Display the image for logo registration. Align the image with the red boundary lines indicating the portion that will be stored, and then press the OK button. The portion of the image within the boundary lines is now registered.

Cancel Cancels logo registration.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

Positioning User Logos

CANON XEED WX520 - Positioning User Logos - 1

[System settings] > [User screen settings] > [Logo position]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

Specify the position of registered user logos as follows.

User screen settings Logo capture Logo position No signal screen Screen when blank Projector on Return Upper L Upper R ►Center Lower L Lower R

Upper L

Upper R

Center

Lower L

Lower R

• The factory default is [Center].
- You can specify the position after a logo has been registered.

No Signal Screen

CANON XEED WX520 - No Signal Screen - 1

[System settings] > [User screen settings] > [No signal screen]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

As the image projected when there is no input signal, you can choose a black, blue, or registered user screen.

User screen settings Logo capture Logo position Center No signal screen Black Screen when blank ►Blue Projector on User logo Return

Black The screen is all black.

Blue The screen is all blue.

User logo The user logo is projected.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• [Blue] is the factory default.

Screen When Blank

CANON XEED WX520 - Screen When Blank - 1

[System settings] > [User screen settings] > [Screen when blank]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can project a black, blue, or registered user screen to blank out projection temporarily by pressing the BLANK button on the remote control.

User screen settings Logo capture Logo position Center No signal screen Blue Screen when blank ▶Black Projector on Blue Return User logo

Black The screen is all black.

Blue The screen is all blue.

User logo The user logo is projected.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

- [Black] is the factory default.

Selecting a Logo at Startup

CANON XEED WX520 - Selecting a Logo at Startup - 1

[System settings] > [User screen settings] > [Projector on]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○

○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can display a specified logo on the screen from the moment the projector is turned on to the moment it is ready for projection.

User screen settings Logo capture Logo position Center No signal screen Blue Screen when blank Skip Projector on Canon logo Return User logo

Skip Projects an input signal immediately after turning on the projector.

Canon logo Displays the Canon logo that was registered in advance at the factory.

User logo The user logo is projected.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

  • [Canon logo] is the factory default.
  • Only images with an aspect of 16:10 can be registered as user logos.

Specifying Auto Power-Off

MENU > [System settings] > [Auto power-off]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○

○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can turn off the lamp or projector automatically in order to save power when the projector is not in use.

Analog PC-1 User screen settings Auto power-off Direct power on Beep Key repeat Key lock Remote control channel Motion blur reduction HDMI in Language Other settings 5 min. 10 min. ►15 min. 20 min. 30 min. 60 min. Disabled Auto English

5 min.— If the selected time elapses 60 min. without any input signal, the projector displays the countdown of the time until the projector will be turned off.

Disabled Disable auto power-off.

Auto power-off is disabled. Direct power-on cannot be used if auto power-off is disabled. OK

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• [15 min.] is the factory default.
- You cannot enable the [Direct power on] function (see the next item), if you select [Disabled].

Specifying Direct Power-On

MENU > [System settings] > [Direct power on]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○

○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can turn on the projector by connecting the power cable without pressing the POWER button.

Analog PC-1 User screen settings Auto power-off 15 min. Direct power on ▶ Off Beep On Key repeat On Key lock Off Remote control channel Independent Motion blur reduction Off HDMI in Auto Language® English Other settings System settings

Off You need to press the POWER button to turn on the projector.

On You can turn on the projector by connecting the power cable only.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• [Off] is the factory default.

CANON XEED WX520 - Specifying Direct Power-On - 2

  • Before enabling direct power on, be sure to set [Auto power-off] to an option other than [Disabled]. Selecting [Disabled] will prevent you from using auto power-off.
    • After turning off the projector, wait at least 5 minutes before turning it on again. It may shorten the lamp life if you turn on the projector immediately after turning it off.

Specifying Silence or Operating Tones

MENU > [System settings] > [Beep]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○

○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can select whether a beep sounds or not when you operate the projector.

Analog PC-1 User screen settings Auto power-off 15 min. Direct power on Off Beep Off Key repeat On Key lock Off Remote control channel Independent Motion blur reduction Off HDMI in Auto Language English Other settings System settings

Off Disables the beep.

On Enables the beep.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• The factory default is [On].
- The beep will not sound if you mute the projector sound with the MUTE button on the remote control.

Specifying Key Repeat Operation

MENU > [System settings] > [Key repeat]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

By pressing and holding the button on the projector or the remote control you can operate Key repeat in the same way as when the button is pressed repeatedly.

Analog PC-1 User screen settings Auto power-off 15 min. Direct power on Off Beep On Key repeat Off Key lock ▶ On Remote control channel Independent Motion blur reduction Off HDMI in Auto Language English Other settings

Off Key repeat is not enabled.

On Key repeat is enabled.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• The factory default is [On].

Locking Projector or Remote Buttons

MENU > [System settings] > [Key lock]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can lock the projector to prevent its operation from either the main unit or remote control.

Analog PC-1 User screen settings Auto power-off 15 min. Direct power on Off Beep On Key repeat On Key lock ▶ Off Remote control channel Main unit Motion blur reduction Remote (wireless) HDMI In Auto Language: English Other settings

Off Disables the key lock.

Main unit Operation is not possible using the main unit. Use the remote control.

Remote (wireless)Disables infrared remote control operations (P36). Use buttons on the main unit. Alternatively, use the optional remote control (RS-RC05), connected to the projector via a cable.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• [Off] is the factory default.

The key lock function becomes effective from the moment the OK button is pressed after selecting [Main unit] or [Remote (wireless)]. Control via the item selected will then be disabled.

To Unlock Key Lock Function

Turn off the projector and unplug the power plug. Hold down the OK button on the main unit and plug in the power cord, as you continue to hold down the OK button. In a moment, a beep will sound, and the controls will be unlocked.

Assigning a Channel for Remote Control

CANON XEED WX520 - Assigning a Channel for Remote Control - 1

[System settings] > [Remote control channel]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○

○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

When using multiple projectors at the same time (maximum 4), you can assign a different channel to each remote control so that each operates independently.

Selecting the Projector Channel
Analog PC-1 User screen settings Auto power-off 15 min. Direct power on Off Beep On Key repeat On Key lock Off Remote control channel Ch1 Motion blur reduction Ch2 HDMI in Ch3 Language Ch4 Other settings ►Independent

Ch1Select the remote control
Ch2channel to use with this
Ch3projector.
Ch4

Independent Remote controls set to any channel can be used.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

  • The factory default is [Independent] for both projector and remote control.
    • After changing the channel on the menu, be sure to change the channel of the remote control too.
  • If a cable is connected, it is not necessary to perform remote control channel setting.

Selecting a Channel on the Remote control

You can change the channel on the remote control as follows.

Ch1 Press and hold the OKbutton and [▲button at the same time for 3 seconds.
Ch2 Press and hold the OKbutton and [▼button at the same time for 3 seconds.
Ch3 Press and hold the OKbutton and [▼button at the same time for 3 seconds.
Ch4 Press and hold the OKbutton and [▼button at the same time for 3 seconds.
IndependentPress and hold the OKbutton and [●button at the same time for 3 seconds.

Reducing Motion Blur

MENU > [System settings] > [Motion blur reduction]

○ HDMI Component LAN
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

Motion blur is blurring that occurs during video playback. Motion blur reduction can make this blurring less noticeable. This function is available in [Presentation] or [Dynamic] image modes (P97).

Analog PC-1 User screen settings Auto power-off 15 min. Direct power on Off Beep On Key repeat On Key lock Off Remote control channel Independent Motion blur reduction ▶Off HDMI in On Language English Other settings

Off Motion blur reduction is not performed.

On Motion blur reduction is performed.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• [Off] is the factory default.
- If motion blur reduction generates distracting image noise, select [Off].
- Effects of motion blur reduction cannot be checked during menu display.
- Especially effective for motion of computer graphics and similar high-resolution images.

Specifying HDMI Input

MENU > [System settings] > [HDMI In]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○

○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

Set the type of equipment which is connected to the HDMI port.

Analog PC-1 User screen settings Auto power-off 15 min. Direct power on Off Beep On Key repeat On Key lock Off Remote control channel Independent Motion blur reduction Off HDMI in Auto Language Computer Other settings

Auto Select when AV equipment will be connected. Image processing, menu displays, and other elements are adjusted for video equipment.

Computer Select when a computer will be connected. Image processing, menu displays, and other elements are adjusted for a computer.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• [Auto] is the factory default.

Selecting a Display Language

MENU > [System settings] > [Language]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○

○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can select the language in which the menus are displayed.

Analog PC-1 User screen settings Auto power-off 15 min. Direct power on Off Beep On Key repeat On Key lock Off Remote control channel Independent Motion blur reduction Off HDMI In Auto Language English Other settings System settings

Use the [▲/ [ ]▼[ ] /▶] buttons to select the menu language, then press the OK button.

EnglishEnglish
GermanDeutsch
FrenchFrançais
ItalianItaliano
SpanishEspañol
PortuguesePortuguês
SwedishSvenska
RussianРусский
DutchNederlands
FinnishSuomi
NorwegianNorsk
TurkishTürkçe
PolishPolski
HungarianMagyar
CzechČeština
DanishDansk
Arabicإِنطَرِي
Chinese (Simplified)中文简体
Chinese (Traditional)中文繁體
Korean한국어
Japanese日本語

When the setting is completed, press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

Requiring a Password for Operation

MENU > [System settings] > [Other settings] > [Password settings]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○

○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

Disables the projector unless the correct password is entered.

Other settings Password settings ▶Off Register password On Gamma restore Off Lamp counter Air filter counter Firmware 01.000000 Factory defaults Return

Off The projector can be used even if no password is entered.

On The projector cannot be used unless you enter your password.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• [Off] is the factory default.
- You cannot set [On] unless you have completed [Register password].

Once you set a password, the password entry screen appears at power-on.

Enter a 4 digit password.

Enter the password using the [▲/ [ ]▶ [▼/ [ ]◀buttons.

If the password is valid, the projection starts. If you enter a wrong password three times, the power will be turned off.

- The power is also turned off if no password is input for 3 minutes.

To Cancel the Password

Turn off the projector and unplug the power plug.

Hold down the MENU button on the side control and connect the power plug.

Make sure to keep holding down the

MENU button until a beep sounds. When the beep sounds, the password is canceled. (The entered password is also reset.)

To forcibly cancel the password from the remote control, in standby state press the MENU button 3 times, then press the POWER button.

Setting a Password

CANON XEED WX520 - Setting a Password - 1

[System settings] > [Other settings] > [Register password]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can register a password for starting projection.

Other settings Password settings Off Register password Gamma restore Off Lamp counter Air filter counter Firmware 01.000000 Factory defaults Return

Press the OK button after selecting [Register password], and the following screen for registering a password appears.

Register password Enter new password. - * * * Cancel

Enter a 4 digit password.

Enter the password using the [▲/[]▶[▼/[]▶buttons.

The 4-digit password is entered from the left to right digits. When the final digit is entered, the password is automatically registered.

Press the MENU button to abort the registration.

Restoring Original Gamma Settings

CANON XEED WX520 - Restoring Original Gamma Settings - 1

[System settings] > [Other settings] > [Gamma restore]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

This function is used when changing and turning of the tone characteristics and achromatic color is noticed over a long period of time. Gamma restore can only be used when the lamp has been on for approximately 30 minutes or longer.

Other settings Password settings Off Register password Gamma restore ▶Off Lamp counter Adjust Air filter counter Firmware 01.000000 Factory defaults Return

Off Returns to the factory default without performing Gamma restore.

Adjust Performs Gamma restore and applies the result.

Gamma restore Activating gamma restore About 150 sec. required. OK Cancel

OK Gamma restore is performed.

Cancel Gamma restore is not performed.

  • If Gamma restore is performed, the projected image will be adjusted for a period of approximately 150 seconds.
  • To stop Gamma restore, press the POWER button or the EXIT button.

CANON XEED WX520 - Restoring Original Gamma Settings - 4

If Gamma restore is performed, the tone characteristics and achromatic color will be restored as close as possible to the condition when the projector was purchased, however it is not possible to restore it completely to the original condition. So the changing and turning color cannot be eliminated completely.

Resetting the Lamp Counter

CANON XEED WX520 - Resetting the Lamp Counter - 1

[System settings] > [Other settings] > [Lamp counter]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB ○

You can reset the lamp counter that indicates the time for lamp replacement.

CANON XEED WX520 - Resetting the Lamp Counter - 2
Caution

Do not reset the lamp counter except when you have replaced the lamp. Otherwise, the lamp counter cannot indicate the correct timing for replacing the lamp.

For details of lamp replacement, refer to page 201.

Other settings Password settings Off Register password Gamma restore Off Lamp counter Air filter counter Firmware 01.000000 Factory defaults Return

Select [Lamp counter] and press the OK button to display the lamp counter.

Lamp counter 700H Reset Return

Select [Reset] and press the OK button.

Lamp counter reset Only do this after changing the lamp. Reset the lamp counter? Yes No

Select [Yes] on the screen for confirmation and press the OK button to reset the lamp counter. Press the MENU button or EXIT button.

■ About the Display of the Lamp Counter

The lamp counter display is as follows.

Less than 2,700 hours

Displayed as a green bar.

Lamp counter 2500H Reset Return

2,700 hours to less than 3,000 hours Displayed as a green and yellow bar.

Lamp counter 2850H Reset Return

When the lamp hours are 2,700 hours to less than 3,000 hours, the message "Obtain a new lamp." appears when power is turned on.

Lamp replacement Obtain a new lamp. Do you want to display this message again? Yes No

Over 3,000 hours

Displayed as a green, yellow and red bar.

Lamp counter 3100H Reset Return

The message "Replace with the new lamp." appears when power is turned on.

Lamp replacement Replace with the new lamp.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ About the Display of the Lamp Counter - 6

  • The lamp counter provides an estimate of the time remaining until the lamp must be replaced. This value is based on the hours in use and the present load on the lamp.
  • The number of hours indicated is equivalent to use under these conditions: [Vertical projection] (P152) set to [Off], and [Lamp mode] (P107) set to [Full power].

Resetting the Air Filter Counter

CANON XEED WX520 - Resetting the Air Filter Counter - 1

[System settings] > [Other settings] > [Air filter counter]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB ○

This resets the counter which reminds you of the time for cleaning and replacing the air filter.

CANON XEED WX520 - Resetting the Air Filter Counter - 2

For details about how to replace or clean the filter, refer to page 199.

Other settings Password settings Off Register password Gamma restore Off Lamp counter Air filter counter Firmware 01.000000 Factory defaults Return

To view the air filter counter, press the OK button when [Air filter counter] is selected.

Air filter counter 300H Reset Return

Select [Reset] and press the OK button.

Air filter counter reset Only reset after cleaning the air filter. Reset the air filter counter? Yes No

To reset the air filter counter, select [Yes] on the confirmation screen and press the OK button. Press the MENU button or EXIT button.

Updating the Firmware

CANON XEED WX520 - Updating the Firmware - 1

[System settings] > [Other settings] > [Firmware]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○

○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

Use a firmware update program stored on a USB flash drive to update the projector firmware.

Download firmware updates from the Canon website and store them at the root directory on the USB flash drive.

Other settings Password settings Off Register password Gamma restore Off Lamp counter Air filter counter Firmware 01.000000 Factory defaults Return

Select [Firmware], press the OK button, and check the firmware version displayed. Selecting [OK] will display an update confirmation screen. To update the firmware, select [Yes].

Firmware updating takes about three minutes. During the update, the LED indicator will flash in red. Do not turn off the projector while the LED is flashing.

Firmware update Firmware version correct? 01.000000 → 01.010000 Yes No

After the update, the projector will automatically turn itself off and enter standby mode.

CANON XEED WX520 - Updating the Firmware - 4

• In some cases, it may not be possible to download the update. If so, contact the Canon Customer Support Center.
- This firmware version is for illustration only, and the actual number will be different.

Resetting to the Default Setting

CANON XEED WX520 - Resetting to the Default Setting - 1

[System settings] > [Other settings] > [Factory defaults]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○

○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can reset the menu item settings and restore the system settings to the factory defaults.

Other settings Password settings Off Register password Gamma restore Off Lamp counter Air filter counter Firmware 01.000000 Factory defaults Return

Select [Factory defaults] and press the OK button. The following screen for confirmation appears.

Factory defaults All settings will be reset to factory defaults. [Image mode] will be initialized to [Standard]. OK? OK Cancel

OK Settings are reset to default.

Cancel Settings are not reset to default.

  • This function does not reset the values for [Lamp counter], [Language], [Remote control], [Input signal], [Network settings], [Air filter counter], [Professional settings] ([Micro-digital image shift], [Registration], [Fan mode], [Vertical projection], and [Edge blending]) and [Create profile].
  • For factory defaults settings, refer to P306 - P313.
  • The contents of the user memory return to the conditions at the time it was saved. (P98)

Checking Projector Information

CANON XEED WX520 - Checking Projector Information - 1

> [Information]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB ○

You can check information about the signal types of the images projected and other information.

Analog PC-1 Model name Input signal Firmware Serial no. E-mail sender address E-mail recipient address Projector name Location System information ID WUX450 1920 x 1200 01.000000 0123456 Information

Information shown

Item Explanation
Model name WUX450/WX520/WUX400ST/WX450ST
Input signal Details ofthe input signal currently selectedInformation such as the type, resolution, and frequency of the signal is displayed.
FirmwareCurrent firmware version
Serial no. Serial numberer unique to this projector
E-mail sender address*Sender e-mail address used for sending error mails (P187)
E-mail recipient address*Displays [Already set] or [Not set] to show whether a recipient e-mail address has been set for receiving error mails. (P187)
Projector name* Namewhich identifies this projector on the network
Location* Location where the projector is installed
System information IDSystem information. Normally this is not displayed.

* Not displayed when network functions are [Off].

MULTIMEDIA PROJECTOR

WUX450

WX520

WUX400ST

WX450ST

Installation and Maintenance

CANON XEED WX520 - Installation and Maintenance - 1

natural_image Two identical white and black cameras with visible lens and control buttons, shown from different angles (no text or symbols on the devices themselves)

Request projector installation from a qualified technician, if possible, or contact the Canon Customer Support Center. For ceiling installation in particular, always request installation from a qualified technician or contact the Canon Customer Support Center.

Installation

Table of Contents

Safety Instructions

Before Use

Operation

Projecting an Image

Useful Functions Available During a Presentation

Setting Functions from Menus

Installation and Maintenance

Installation

Connecting to a Network

Maintenance

Networked Multi-Projection

Networked Multi-Projection Overview

Operation in Each Mode

Functions in All Modes

Appendix

Other Information

Index

Precautions When Carrying/Shipping the Projector

Prepare the projector as described below before carrying it.

CANON XEED WX520 - Precautions When Carrying/Shipping the Projector - 1
Caution

  • Disconnect the cables connected to the projector. Carrying the projector with the cables attached may cause an accident.
  • Retract the adjustable feet.
  • Do not reuse any packaging or shock-absorbent materials that were supplied with the projector at the time of purchase for transporting or shipping the projector.

Protection of the projector cannot be guaranteed if used packaging or shock-absorbent materials are reused. Fragments from shock-absorbent material may also enter the interior of the projector which could cause a malfunction.

Precautions for Installation

Be sure to read “Safety Instructions” and “For Safe Use” (P16 – P29). Also take the following precautions during installation.

CANON XEED WX520 - Precautions for Installation - 1
Caution

  • Do not strike the projector or subject it to impact. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
  • Do not install the projector so that it is inclined or standing vertically. The projector may tip over, causing a malfunction.
  • Do not block the air intake or exhaust vents of the cooling fan. If the intake or exhaust vent is

Air intake vent
CANON XEED WX520 - Precautions for Installation - 2

natural_image Line drawing of a rectangular electronic device with two ports and directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Exhaust vent

blocked, heat may accumulate inside the projector, causing a malfunction.

■ Do Not Use in the Following Environments

  • Do not install the projector in a location that is damp, or where there is a lot of dust, oily smoke or tobacco smoke. Optical parts such as the lens and mirror may be stained, resulting in poor picture quality.
  • Do not install the projector near high-voltage electrical power lines or an electrical power source. The projector may not operate correctly.
  • Do not use the projector on a soft surface such as carpet or sponge mat, etc. Heat may accumulate inside the projector, causing a malfunction.
  • Do not use the projector in a location that is subject to very high temperatures, very low temperatures, or high levels of humidity. Doing so may cause a malfunction. The temperature and humidity ranges for operation and the temperature range for storage are shown below.
Operating temperatureOperating humidity Storage temperature
0°C (32°F) – 40°C (104°F)Up to 85%-20°C (-4°F) – 60°C (140°F)

■ Do Not Touch the Lens with Bare Hands

Do not touch the lens with bare hands. Doing so may adversely affect picture quality.

■ Allow a 30 Min. Warm Up before Focus Adjustment (P59), if Possible

The focus position may not stabilize immediately after startup, due to lamp heat. When adjusting focus, it is also helpful to use the test pattern (10) (P291).

■ Install at a Sufficient Distance from Walls and Other Obstructions

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Install at a Sufficient Distance from Walls and Other Obstructions - 1

If the air intake or exhaust vent is blocked, heat will accumulate inside the projector, possibly resulting in a shortened projector lifetime or a malfunction. Do not install in a closet, on a bookshelf, or in other narrow spaces with poor ventilation. Install in a well-ventilated location. (Ensure a minimum clearance of 50 cm (1.6 ft.) above, on both sides, and behind the projector.)

Air intake vent Warmed airflow Exhaust vent

50 cm (1.6') 50 cm (1.6') 50 cm (1.6')

50 cm (1.6')

■ Be Careful of Condensation

If the temperature of the room rises suddenly, moisture in the air may condense on the projector lens and mirror, causing the image to become blurred. Wait until the condensation has evaporated for the image projected to return to normal.

■ At Altitudes above 2,300 m (7,545.8'), Adjust the Settings

Projector settings must be adjusted when using the projector at altitudes of 2,300 m (7,545.8') or higher. Specifically, refer to instructions for [Fan mode] (P152) in the [Install settings] menu.

■ When Using Mounted on the Ceiling

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ When Using Mounted on the Ceiling - 1

When the projector is used mounted on the ceiling or installed in a high location, it is necessary to periodically clean the air intake and exhaust vents, and the area around the air filter. If dust accumulates in the intake or exhaust vents, cooling performance will deteriorate, causing the internal temperature to rise and possibly resulting in a malfunction or fire. Use a vacuum cleaner or similar means to remove dust from the intake vent and exhaust vent.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ When Using Mounted on the Ceiling - 2

natural_image Diagram of a computer monitor with indicator lights and a stand, no text or symbols present

■ Install Facing in the Correct Direction

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Install Facing in the Correct Direction - 1
Caution

The projector can be installed facing any direction ^*1 , as shown below. However, projection upward (4 or downward ( ) may shorten the useful life of the lamp. Installation in these orientations also requires projector settings adjustment. Specifically, for upward or downward projection, refer to instructions for [Vertical projection] (P152) in the [Install settings] menu.
A 10° 10° Upward projection: Inclination of the projector should be no more than 10° from the vertical axis.*² B 10° 10° Downward projection: Inclination of the projector should be no more than 10° from the vertical axis.*²

10° 10°

If installing the projector on the floor or hanging from the ceiling, the left / right inclination of the projector should be no more than 10^ .*2

Do proj on i dam

Do not use the projector standing on its side. This may damage the lamp.

*1 No optional accessories are available for installing the projector in ways other than ceiling installation (P39, P132, P305).
*2 Failure to do so may damage the lamp.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Install Facing in the Correct Direction - 5

When installing the projector facing upward or downward, specify which way the projector is facing in [Install settings] > [Professional settings] > [Vertical projection]. (P152)

Setting Up the Projector

■ Positioning the Projector in Front of the Screen

Place the projector in front of the screen.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Positioning the Projector in Front of the Screen - 1

On some screens, colors may appear distorted when images are viewed from the side, but this does not indicate a problem with the projector. For best results, use a matte screen with a wide viewing angle (WUX400ST/WX450ST).

Screen Viewing areas where colors may appear distorted Optical axis 30° 30°

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Positioning the Projector in Front of the Screen - 3

• To avoid keystone distortion, install the projector so that it is at right angles to the screen.
- The screen must not be exposed to direct sunlight or light from lighting equipment. In a bright room, it is recommended that lights be turned off, curtains be drawn, and other steps taken to make the screen easier to see.

Screen Optical axis

■ Floor Installation

To adjust the projection position when the projector is installed on the floor, use the lens shift function (P58 and P134) to adjust up / down / left / right. You can also use the adjustable feet to incline the projector upward by up to 6°.

For information about the relationship between screen size and projection distance, refer to page 133.

Lens shift Adjustable feet

■ Upward-Tilted Installation

To correct keystone distortion when the projector is tilted upward (using adjustable feet, for example), perform keystone correction (P150) or corner adjustment (P150).

■ Projection from High Surfaces

For projection from a shelf or other high surface, the projector can be installed upside-down and the projected image inverted. In this case, attach the option feet on top of the projector.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Projection from High Surfaces - 1

natural_image Illustration of people viewing a presentation screen with charts and pie charts, connected to a projector (no text or symbols)

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Projection from High Surfaces - 2

When setting the projector on a high surface for projection, be sure the surface is flat and stable. Failure to do so could result in the projector falling down and causing an accident or personal injury.

Attaching Option Feet (RS-FT01, Sold Separately)

Remove the hole caps and screw the option feet into the holes.

The caps are located at four positions on top of the projector. They are removed differently depending on their position.

Top
(1) (2) (2) (1)

Removing hole caps labeled (1)

Pry off the caps by inserting a slender tool such as a flat screwdriver in the depression.

CANON XEED WX520 - Removing hole caps labeled (1) - 1

natural_image Diagram of a mechanical component with two arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

Installation Procedure

Removing hole caps labeled (2)

Open the lamp cover and use a screwdriver or similar tool to push off the caps from below.

Hole cap

CANON XEED WX520 - Removing hole caps labeled (2) - 2

  • Keep the caps in a safe place to avoid losing them.
  • The option feet can be used in conjunction with the adjustable feet. When changing the projection position with adjustable feet, you can make the projector more stable by attaching option feet to the two holes toward the back of the bottom surface.

■ Ceiling Mounting or Rear Projection

You can mount the projector on the ceiling (ceiling mounting) with it turned upside down or place it behind the screen (rear projection) if you use a translucent screen.

Illustration showing a presentation with charts and pie charts, viewed by three people observing a device labeled 'Laser'.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Ceiling Mounting or Rear Projection - 2

natural_image Illustration of a projector projecting onto a screen to three people watching (no text or symbols present)

Ceiling mounting Rear projection

Make sure to use the optional ceiling attachment. For the ceiling attachment, refer to "Option" (P305). For details, refer to the assembly and installation manual provided with the ceiling attachment.

Relationship of Image Size to Projection Distance

The size of projected images is determined by zooming, relative to the distance from the projector to the screen. (Optical zooming on the WUX450/WX520, and electronic zooming on the WUX400ST/WX450ST.) Refer to the following table and decide the distance between the projector and screen.

16:9 / 16:10 Image Size (diagonal) Height Width

4:3 Width Height

WUX450/WX520
Projection distance [m (feet)]

Image Size (Dia.)WUX450 WX520
16:10 16:9 4:3 16:1016:9 4:3
Wide limitTele limitWide limitTele limitWide limitTele limitWide limitTele limitWide limitTele limitWide limitTele limit
401.2 (3.9)2.2 (7.2)1.2 (3.9)2.2 (7.2)1.4 (4.6)2.4 (7.9)1.2 (3.9)2.2 (7.2)1.3 (4.3)2.3 (7.5)1.4 (4.6)2.5 (8.2)
501.5 (4.9)2.7 (8.9)1.5 (4.9)2.8 (9.1)1.7 (5.6)3.1 (10.2)1.5 (4.9)2.8 (9.1)1.6 (5.2)2.8 (9.1)1.7 (5.6)3.1 (10.2)
601.8 (5.9)3.2 (10.5)1.9 (6.2)3.3 (10.8)2.0 (6.6)3.7 (12.1)1.8 (5.9)3.3 (10.8)1.9 (6.2)3.4 (11.2)2.1 (6.7)3.8 (12.5)
802.4 (7.9)4.3 (14.1)2.5 (8.2)4.4 (14.4)2.7 (8.9)4.9 (16.1)2.5 (8.2)4.4 (14.4)2.5 (8.2)4.6 (15.1)2.8 (9.2)5.0 (16.4)
1003.0 (9.8)5.4 (17.7)3.1 (10.2)5.5 (18)3.4 (11.2)6.1 (20)3.1 (10.1)5.5 (18.7)3.2 (10.5)5.7 (18.7)3.5 (11.5)6.3 (20.7)
1504.5 (14.8)8.1 (26.6)4.6 (15.1)8.3 (27.2)5.1 (16.7)9.2 (30.2)4.6 (15.1)8.3 (27.2)4.7 (15.4)8.5 (27.9)5.2 (17.1)9.4 (30.8)
2006.0 (19.7)10.8 (35.4)6.2 (20.3)11.1 (36.4)6.8 (22.3)12.2 (40)2 (20.3)11.1 (36.4)6.3 (20.7)11.4 (37.4)7.0 (23)12.6 (41.3)
2507.5 (24.6)13.5 (44.3)7.7 (25.3)13.9 (45.6)8.5 (27.9)15.3 (50.2)7.7 (25.3)13.9 (45.56)7.9 (25.9)14.2 (46.6)8.7 (28.5)15.7 (51.5)
3009.0 (29.5)16.2 (53.1)9.3 (30.5)16.6 (54.5)10.2 (33.5)18.3 (60)9.2 (30.2)16.6 (54.5)9.5 (31.2)17.1 (56.1)10.5 (34.4)18.8 (61.7)

WUX400ST/WX450ST
Projection distance [m (feet)]

Image Size (Dia.)WUX400STWX450ST
16:1016:94:316:1016:94:3
300.35 (1.15)0.36 (1.18)0.40 (1.31)0.36 (1.18)0.37 (1.21)0.41 (1.35)
400.47 (1.54)0.49 (1.61)0.54 (1.77)0.49 (1.61)0.50 (1.64)0.55 (1.80)
500.60 (1.97)0.61 (2.00)0.68 (2.23)0.61 (2.00)0.63 (2.07)0.69 (2.26)
600.72 (2.36)0.74 (2.43)0.81 (2.66)0.74 (2.43)0.76 (2.49)0.83 (2.72)
800.96 (3.15)0.99 (3.25)1.09 (3.58)0.98 (3.22)1.01 (3.31)1.12 (3.67)
1001.20 (3.93)1.24 (4.07)1.36 (4.46)1.23 (4.04)1.27 (4.17)1.40 (4.59)
1501.81 (5.94)1.86 (6.10)2.05 (6.73)1.86 (6.10)1.91 (6.27)2.10 (6.89)
2002.42 (7.94)2.49 (8.17)2.74 (8.99)2.48 (8.14)2.55 (8.37)2.81 (9.22)
2503.03 (9.94)3.11 (10.20)3.43 (11.25)3.10 (10.17)3.19 (10.47)3.52 (11.55)
3003.64 (11.94)3.73 (12.24)

CANON XEED WX520 - Relationship of Image Size to Projection Distance - 3

The recommended range for the WUX400ST/WX450ST applies to 50-200 inch images.

■ Lens Shift Function

You can reposition the image in all directions by turning the lens shift dials on the side of the projector, which moves the lens up, down, left, or right. For instructions, refer to “Lens Shift Control” (P45).

■ Amount of Lens Shift

The amount of lens shift is indicated as a percentage relative to the image height and width.

The lens shift ranges for each model of projector are as follows.

WUX450 WX520 WUX400ST WX450ST
A (Amount of shift up) +60% +62% +75%+77%
B (Amount of horizontal shift)±10% ±10%±10% ±10%

The projector supports vertical and horizontal lens shift. Performance using lens shift is ensured within the recommended range described below. Using lens shift outside of this range may cause problems such as peripheral dimness or lower resolution. In this case, adjust lens shift to within the recommended range.

Recommended lens shift range 10% 13% A A Projection range without using lens shift B B Lens shift range

Maximum upward (A) and horizontal (B) movement using lens shift (reference values, in cm)

WUX450/WX520

Image Size (Dia.)WUX450 WX520
16:10 16:9 4:3 16:10 16:9 4:3
ABABABABABAB
4032 (12.6)9 (3.5)30 (11.8)9 (3.5)37 (14.6)8 (3.1)33 (13.0)9 (3.5)31 (12.2)9 (3.5)38 (15.0)8 (3.1)
6048 (18.9)13 (5.1)45 (17.7)13 (5.1)55 (21.7)12 (4.7)48 (18.9)13 (5.1)45 (17.7)13 (5.1)55 (21.7)12 (4.7)
8065 (25.6)17 (6.7)60 (23.6)18 (7.1)73 (28.7)16 (6.3)65 (25.6)17 (6.7)60 (23.6)18 (7.1)73 (28.7)16 (6.3)
10081 (31.9)22 (8.7)75 (29.5)22 (8.7)91 (35.8)20 (7.9)81 (31.9)22 (8.7)75 (29.5)22 (8.7)91 (35.8)20 (7.9)
150121 (47.6)32 (12.6)112 (44.1)33 (13.0)137 (53.9)30 (11.8)121 (47.6)32 (12.6)112 (44.1)33 (13.0)137 (53.9)30 (11.8)
200162 (63.8)43 (16.9)149 (58.7)44 (17.3)183 (72.0)41 (16.1)162 (63.8)43 (16.9)149 (58.7)44 (17.3)183 (72.0)41 (16.1)
250202 (79.5)54 (21.3)187 (73.6)55 (21.7)229 (90.2)51 (20.1)202 (79.5)54 (21.3)187 (73.6)55 (21.7)229 (90.2)51 (20.1)
300242 (95.3)65 (25.6)224 (88.2)66 (26.0)274 (107.9)61 (24.0)242 (95.3)65 (25.6)224 (88.2)66 (26.0)274 (107.9)61 (24.0)

WUX400ST/WX450ST

Image Size (Dia.)WUX400ST WX450ST
16:10 16:9 4:3 16:10 16:9 4:3
ABABABABABAB
3030 (11.8)6 (2.4)28 (11.0)7 (2.8)34 (13.4)6 (2.4)31 (12.2)6 (2.4)29 (11.4)7 (2.8)35 (13.8)6 (2.4)
4040 (15.6)9 (3.5)37 (14.6)9 (3.5)46 (18.1)8 (3.2)41 (16.1)9 (3.5)38 (15.0)9 (3.5)47 (18.5)8 (3.2)
5050 (19.7)11 (4.3)47 (18.5)11 (4.3)57 (22.4)10 (3.9)52 (20.5)11 (4.3)48 (18.9)11 (4.3)59 (23.2)10 (3.9)
6061 (24.0)13 (5.1)56 (22.1)13 (5.1)69 (27.2)12 (4.7)62 (24.4)13 (5.1)58 (22.8)13 (5.1)70 (27.6)12 (4.7)
8081 (31.9)17 (6.7)75 (29.5)18 (7.1)91 (35.8)16 (6.3)83 (32.7)17 (6.7)77 (30.3)18 (7.1)94 (37.0)16 (6.3)
100101 (39.8)22 (8.7)93 (36.6)22 (8.7)114 (44.9)20 (7.9)104 (40.9)22 (8.7)96 (37.8)22 (8.7)117 (46.1)20 (7.9)
150151 (59.5)32 (12.6)140 (55.1)33 (13.0)171 (67.3)30 (11.8)155 (61.0)32 (12.6)144 (56.7)33 (13.0)176 (69.3)30 (11.8)
200202 (79.5)43 (16.9)187 (73.6)44 (17.3)229 (90.2)41 (16.1)207 (81.5)43 (16.9)192 (75.6)44 (17.3)235 (92.5)41 (16.1)
250252 (99.2)54 (21.3)233 (91.7)55 (21.7)286 (112.6)51 (20.1)259 (102.0)54 (21.3)240 (94.5)55 (21.7)293 (115.4)51 (20.1)
300303 (119.3)65 (25.6)280 (110.2)66 (26.0)343 (135.0)61 (24.0)311 (122.4)65 (25.6)288 (113.4)66 (26.0)352 (138.6)61 (24.0)

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Amount of Lens Shift - 2

• (A) values are the approximate vertical lens shift distance from the lowest image position.
• (B) values are the approximate horizontal lens shift distance from the central image position within the range supported for lens shift.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Amount of Lens Shift - 3

  • Watch projected images as you perform lens shift adjustment.
  • When the image no longer moves, you have reached the limit of the lens shift range. Do not turn the lens shift dial excessively in one direction, which may damage the projector.

Connectable Equipment and Input Terminals

HDMI Use this name to select the image input.↓ Direction of signal and data flow
HDMI TerminalThe name of the terminal to which to connect equipment(Pxxx) indicates the page(s) to refer to.

CANON XEED WX520 - Connectable Equipment and Input Terminals - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Analog PC-1 Digital PC"] --> B["ANALOG PC-1 / DVI-I terminal"]
    B --> C["Computer (P137) DVI-I IN terminal can only be used to connect to a PC."]
    C --> D["Analog PC-2 Component"]
    D --> E["ANALOG PC-2/ COMPONENT terminal"]
    E --> F["Computer (P137, P138) AV equipment (P141)"]
    F --> G["AV equipment (P140) Digital video camera* (P140) Computer (P139)"]
    G --> H["* Select playback mode before connecting."]
    H --> I["Service Port (It is not used during ordinary use.)"]
    I --> J["USB LAN"]
    J --> K["USB Port LAN terminal"]
    K --> L["Network (P168)"]
    L --> M["Optional remote control (RS-RC05) (P36)"]
    M --> N["Audio signal for each image input"]
    N --> O["Audio OUT terminal"]
    O --> P["AMplified speakers (P139, P142)"]
    P --> Q["Audio IN terminal"]
    Q --> R["Remote terminal"]
    R --> S["Audio OUT terminal"]
    S --> T["Service Port LAN terminal"]

Connecting a Computer

Connect the projector to the computer.

A digital connection (P138) is recommended when projecting an image in high quality.

When using a computer with an HDMI output terminal, a digital connection (P139) can be made using an HDMI cable.

CANON XEED WX520 - Connecting a Computer - 1

Before connecting the cables, turn off both the projector and computer.

Caution

■ Connecting to RGB Monitor Output Terminal (Analog Connection)

Connecting with a computer cable (Input signal type: [Analog PC-2] P53)

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Connecting to RGB Monitor Output Terminal (Analog Connection) - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Computer"] --> B["Monitor output terminal (Mini D-sub 15-pin)"]
    B --> C["AUDIO output terminal (AUDIO OUT)"]
    C --> D["Computer cable (supplied)"]
    D --> E["When inputting corresponding audio"]
    E --> F["Audio cable (not included)"]
    F --> G["Projector"]
    G --> H["To ANALOG PC-2 / COMPONENT terminal"]
    H --> I["7 1 DVI-I"]
    H --> J["2 / COMPONENT"]
    H --> K["HDMI"]
    H --> L["To AUDIO IN terminal 2"]

Connecting with VGA-DVI cable (Input signal type: [Analog PC-1] P53)

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Connecting to RGB Monitor Output Terminal (Analog Connection) - 2

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Computer"] --> B["Monitor output terminal (Mini D-sub 15-pin)"]
    B --> C["AUDIO output terminal (AUDIO OUT)"]
    C --> D["VGA-DVI-I cable (not included)"]
    D --> E["When inputting corresponding audio"]
    E --> F["Audio cable (not included)"]
    F --> G["Projector"]
    G --> H["To ANALOG PC-1 / DVI-I terminal"]
    H --> I["To AUDIO IN terminal 1"]
    I --> J["1 DVI-I"]
    I --> K["2 / COM"]
    J --> L["1"]
    K --> M["2"]
    L --> N["+"]
    M --> O["+"]

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Connecting to RGB Monitor Output Terminal (Analog Connection) - 3

  • Use a VGA-DVI-I cable in which all pins are connected. If the cable is a type in which all pins are not connected, the image may not be correctly displayed.
  • Use an audio cable without a built-in resistor. Using an audio cable with a built-in resistor will reduce the audio volume.
  • The AUDIO IN terminal can be changed in the Audio in terminal select screen (P153).

Connecting with a BNC cable (Input signal type: [Analog PC-2] P53)
CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Connecting to RGB Monitor Output Terminal (Analog Connection) - 4

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Computer"] --> B["Monitor output terminal (Mini D-sub 15-pin)"]
    B --> C["Monitor output terminal (BNC terminal converter cable (not included)"]
    C --> D["BNC cable (not included)"]
    D --> E["When inputting corresponding audio"]
    E --> F["Audio cable (not included)"]
    F --> G["Audio output terminal (AUDIO OUT)"]
    H["Projector"] --> I["To ANALOG PC-2 / COMPONENT terminal"]
    I --> J["To AUDIO IN terminal 2"]
    K["Computer"] --> L["Monitor output terminal (Mini D-sub 15-pin)"]
    L --> M["Monitor output terminal (BNC terminal converter cable (not included)"]
    M --> N["BNC cable (not included)"]
    N --> O["When inputting corresponding audio"]
    O --> P["Audio cable (not included)"]
    P --> Q["Audio output terminal (AUDIO OUT)"]

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Connecting to RGB Monitor Output Terminal (Analog Connection) - 5

  • A signal with a dot clock higher than 162 MHz cannot be projected.
  • Use an audio cable without a built-in resistor. Using an audio cable with a built-in resistor will reduce the audio volume.
  • The AUDIO IN terminal can be changed in the Audio in terminal select screen (P153).

■ Connecting to DVI Monitor Output Terminal (Digital Connection)

Connecting with a DVI cable (Input signal type: [Digital PC] P53)
CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Connecting to DVI Monitor Output Terminal (Digital Connection) - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Computer"] --> B["Monitor output terminal (DVI terminal)"]
    B --> C["AUDIO output terminal (AUDIO OUT)"]
    C --> D["DVI cable (not included)"]
    D --> E["When inputting corresponding audio"]
    E --> F["Audio cable (not included)"]
    F --> G["Projector"]
    G --> H["To ANALOG PC-1 / DVI-I terminal"]
    H --> I["1 DVI-I"]
    H --> J["2 / CON"]
    I --> K["To AUDIO IN terminal 1"]
    J --> K

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Connecting to DVI Monitor Output Terminal (Digital Connection) - 2

  • Use an audio cable without a built-in resistor. Using an audio cable with a built-in resistor will reduce the audio volume.
  • The AUDIO IN terminal can be changed in the Audio in terminal select screen (P153).

■ Connecting with an HDMI cable (Input signal type: [HDMI] P53)

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Connecting with an HDMI cable (Input signal type: [HDMI] P53) - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Computer"] --> B["Digital video output terminal (HDMI Terminal)"]
    B --> C["HDMI cable (not included) * When an HDMI cable is connected, digital audio is also connected at the same time."]
    D["Projector"] --> E["To HDMI terminal"]
    E --> F["1/2 / COMPONENT"]
    E --> G["HDMI"]

■ Outputting Audio to Speakers

It is possible to output audio from the projected images to amplified speakers.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Outputting Audio to Speakers - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Projector"] --> B["To AUDIO OUT terminal"]
    B --> C["Audio cable (not included)"]
    C --> D["Speaker"]
    D --> E["RCA terminal"]
    D --> F["Mini jack"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Outputting Audio to Speakers - 2

- Use an audio cable without a built-in resistor. Using an audio cable with a built-in resistor will reduce the audio volume.

Connecting AV Equipment

Connect the projector and AV equipment.

The description provided here is one example. For more detailed information, refer to the manual for the connected AV equipment.

CANON XEED WX520 - Connecting AV Equipment - 1

Caution

Before connecting the cables, turn off both the projector and AV equipment.

■ Connecting to Digital Video Output Terminal (Digital Connection)

Connecting with an HDMI cable (Input signal type: [HDMI] P53)

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Connecting to Digital Video Output Terminal (Digital Connection) - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["AV equipment"] --> B["Digital video camera"]
    B --> C["Digital video output terminal (HDMI Terminal)"]
    C --> D["HDMI cable (not included)<br>* When an HDMI cable is connected,<br>digital audio is also connected at the same time."]
    E["Projector"] --> F["To HDMI terminal"]
    F --> G["2 / COMPONENT"]
    F --> H["HDMI"]

■ Connecting to Analog Video Output Terminal (Analog Connection)

Connecting with a component cable (Input signal type: [Component] P53)

Component video signals from AV equipment can be supplied to the projector by connecting the component cable to the projector's COMPONENT terminal.

Use a commercially available component cable (not included) that fits the terminal type of the AV equipment to create a relay connection.

CANON XEED WX520 - Connecting with a component cable (Input signal type: [Component] P53) - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["AV equipment"] --> B["RCA component terminal"]
    B --> C["D terminal"]
    C --> D["Video output terminal"]
    D --> E["RCA terminal"]
    E --> F["Mini jack"]
    F --> G["AUDIO output terminal"]

    H["Projector"] --> I["To ANALOG PC-2 / COMPONENT terminal"]
    I --> J["DVI-I"]
    I --> K["2 / COMPONENT"]
    I --> L["HDMI"]
    I --> M["To AUDIO IN terminal 2"]

    N["RCA plug - RCA plug Component cable (not included)"] --> O["D terminal plug - RCA plug component conversion cable (not included)"]
    O --> P["When inputting corresponding audio"]
    P --> Q["Audio cable (not included)"]

    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style M fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

CANON XEED WX520 - Connecting with a component cable (Input signal type: [Component] P53) - 2

  • Use an audio cable without a built-in resistor. Using an audio cable with a built-in resistor will reduce the audio volume.
  • The AUDIO IN terminal can be changed in the Audio in terminal select screen (P153).

■ Outputting Audio to Speakers

It is possible to output audio from the projected images to AV equipment or amplified speakers.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Outputting Audio to Speakers - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Projector"] --> B["To AUDIO OUT terminal"]
    B --> C["Audio cable (not included)"]
    C --> D["RCA terminal"]
    D --> E["Mini jack"]
    E --> F["AUDIO IN terminal (AUDIO IN)"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ccf,stroke:#333

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Outputting Audio to Speakers - 2

Use an audio cable without a built-in resistor. Using an audio cable with a built-in resistor will reduce the audio volume.

Plugging the Projector In

Connect the power cord to the projector and plug it in.

CANON XEED WX520 - Plugging the Projector In - 1

natural_image Line drawing of a beige Sony computer with ventilation slots and cable, showing ports and connectors (no text or symbols)

CANON XEED WX520 - Plugging the Projector In - 2

Connect the ground terminal on the power plug to ground. Not doing so could result in an electric shock. Additionally, it may cause computers to be affected by electromagnetic interference and impair TV and radio reception.

CANON XEED WX520 - Plugging the Projector In - 3

- Fully insert the power cord plug into the socket.

- After turning off the projector, wait at least 5 minutes before turning it on again. It may shorten the lamp life if you turn on the projector immediately after turning it off.

CANON XEED WX520 - Plugging the Projector In - 4

Unplug the power cord when the projector is not in use.

Starting Projection

Starting and Stopping Projection

■ Starting Projection

Press the POWER button on the remote control or on the projector. The [POWER ON] indicator initially flashes green, after which it remains lit.

Remote control Projector POWER INPUT BLANK FRCZE AUTO PC ASPECT ON MENU CHALL AUTO PC INPUT POWER G

■ Stopping Projection

Press the POWER button on the remote control or on the projector twice.

Remote control Projector POWER INPUT BLANK FREEZE AUTO PC ASPECT O/U 1 MENU/OALL AUTO PC INPUT POWER G

■ When the Language Selection Screen Appears

A screen appears when the projector is turned on for the first time. You can select a language to be used by the projector for displaying menus and messages in the window. Select the desired language with the pointer buttons and press the OK button.

You can change the language from the menu at a later time. (P115) If the language selection screen is out of focus, adjust the focus. (P59)

Remote control Projector OK EXIT MENU +VOL OK 1/2 KEystone

Analog PC-1 System settings User screen settings Auto power-off 15 min. Direct power on Off Beep On Key repeat On Key lock Off Remote control channel Independent Motion blur reduction Off HDMI In Auto Language English Other settings

An item highlighted in orange will be selected.

■ When the Password Input Screen Appears

If you have set a password, the password input screen appears. Enter your password. (P116)

■ When “No signal” Appears

With a notebook computer, the user must turn on the external monitor output. (P145)

Press the INPUT button to select the input signal. (P54)

■ When Notebook Computer Screen Does Not Appear

Set your notebook computer to output signals to an external monitor. For more details, refer to “Changing Notebook Computer Screen Output” below.

■ Adjusting Image

  • Set the display resolution of the computer to the highest resolution or the resolution closest to that setting. (P55)
  • Use the auto PC function to adjust shift in computer image or the flickering of the screen. (P57)
  • Adjust the size of projected images by zooming. The WUX450/WX520 uses optical zoom (P57), and the WUX400ST/WX450ST uses electronic zoom. (P149)
  • If the image is blurry, use the focus ring to adjust focus. (P59)
  • Correct any keystone distortion by pressing the KEYSTONE button. (P68)
  • Select the aspect ratio of the projected image (screen aspect) or a screen mode (aspect) according to the aspect ratio of the screen, type of input image signal etc. (P60 – P67)
  • Select an image mode depending on the projected image. (P71)

Changing Notebook Computer Screen Output

For projection from a notebook computer, the computer settings must be adjusted to switch display output.

This operation is not required for a desktop computer.

■ Turning on External Monitor Output

You can turn on the external monitor output via keyboard operation.

To turn on the external monitor output with most computers, press the function key ([F1] to [F12]) which is marked with the external monitor icon while holding down the [Fn] key.

While pressing Key press a key such as .

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Turning on External Monitor Output - 2

  • The function key you use and the method used to turn on the external monitor output vary depending on the model. For details, see the manual for your notebook computer.
  • With Windows 7, you can turn on image output by holding down the Windows logo key and pressing the [P] key.

Locking Installation Settings

MENU > [Install settings] > [Positional lock]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

Operation of installation related functions can be prohibited.

Analog PC-1 Install settings Positional lock ▶ Off Image flip H/V On Screen aspect 16:10 Keystone Horizontal–vertical keystone Digital image shift Professional settings Audio in terminal select Screen color Normal On screen Test pattern Off

Off The positional lock is not used.

On Installation related functions cannot be used.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• The factory default is [Off].
- Locking applies to the following settings: screen aspect, keystone adjustment, digital image shift, horizontal/vertical image flip, and professional settings.

Flipping Image Display

MENU > [Install settings] > [Image flip H/V]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

Select this setting if you want to hang the projector from the ceiling or project an image from behind the screen.

Analog PC-1 Install settings Positional lock Off Image flip H/V None Screen aspect Ceiling mounted Keystone Rear Digital image shift Rear, Ceiling mounted Professional settings Audio in terminal select Screen color Normal On screen Test pattern Off

None Select this to project an image normally.

Ceiling mounted Select this to project an image with the projector hung from the ceiling. The projected image is inverted in both vertical and horizontal directions.

Rear Select this to project an image from behind the screen. The projected image is inverted in the horizontal direction.

Rear, Ceiling mounted Select this to project an image from behind the screen with the projector hung from the ceiling. The projected image is inverted in the vertical direction.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• [None] is the factory default.

Normal (None)
Diagram illustrating a truck delivery scenario with a person seated at a table and a truck approaching a road ahead, showing a cargo box labeled 'R'.

Ceiling Mounting
Diagram illustrating a person seated at a desk receiving a truck-mounted display, with a magnifying glass highlighting the vehicle and a device labeled 'R' visible.

Rear projection
Diagram illustrating a delivery or logistics scene with a person seated, a truck with a 'Я' (Я) sign, a flagpole, and a banner with 'R' (R) inside.

Rear, Ceiling Mounting

Diagram illustrating a person seated at a desk facing a truck-mounted display screen, with a magnified inset showing a document labeled 'B' and a water drop symbol.

• To hang the projector from the ceiling, use the optional bracket. Contact the Canon Customer Support Center for more detailed information.
- If you flip the image, the keystone distortion adjustment will be reset.

Specifying the Screen Aspect

CANON XEED WX520 - Specifying the Screen Aspect - 1

[Install settings] > [Screen aspect]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB ○

Select according to the aspect ratio of the projection screen. (P60)

Analog PC-1 Positional lock Off Image flip H/V None Screen aspect ► 16:10 Keystone 16:9 Digital image shift 4:3 Professional settings 16:9 D. image shift Audio in terminal select 4:3 D. image shift Screen color Normal On screen Test pattern Off

16:10 Select this when you use a screen with an aspect ratio of 16:10.
16:9 Select this when you use a screen with an aspect ratio of 16:9.
4:3 Select this when you use a screen with an aspect ratio of 4:3.
16:9D. image shiftSelect this when you use a screen with an aspect ratio of 16:9.Keystone correction cannot be performed in this mode.However, it is possible to move the image up / down when projecting level.For details about how to move the image, refer to page 63.
4:3D. image shiftSelect this when you use a screen with an aspect ratio of 4:3.Keystone correction cannot be performed in this mode.However, it is possible to move the image left / right when projecting level.For details about how to move the image, refer to page 64.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• [16:10] is the factory default.
- Changing the screen aspect will reset any keystone or digital image shift setting.
- [Auto] may be automatically selected for the aspect depending on the screen aspect setting.

Adjusting the Size of Projected Images (WUX400ST/WX450ST)

CANON XEED WX520 - Adjusting the Size of Projected Images (WUX400ST/WX450ST) - 1

[Install settings] > [Zoom]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

Projected images that do not fit on the screen can be projected at a digitally reduced size.

Analog PC-1 Positional lock Off Image flip H/V None Screen aspect 16:10 Zoom Keystone Horizontal-vertical keystone Digital image shift Professional settings Audio in terminal select Screen color Normal On screen Test pattern Off

Press the [▶button on the remote control to project images at a reduced size, and press the [▶button to enlarge images to full size. Images can be projected at 75-100% of the original size.

• The factory default is 100%.

CANON XEED WX520 - Adjusting the Size of Projected Images (WUX400ST/WX450ST) - 4

D.ZOOM buttons on the remote control cannot be used for this [Zoom] function.

CANON XEED WX520 - Adjusting the Size of Projected Images (WUX400ST/WX450ST) - 5

- [Zoom] is not available when the following features are used.

- Horizontal/vertical keystone correction (P68)

- Split-screen mode (P81)

- Using [Zoom] after specifying corner adjustment (P69) will clear corner adjustment settings and apply the zoom setting. Instead, use [Zoom] before fine-tuning the image position with corner adjustment.

- If images still extend off the screen even after you use [Zoom], you can use corner adjustment (P69) to fine-tune the position of image corners, so that images fit on the screen.

Specifying Keystone Correction

MENU > [Install settings] > [Keystone]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

Two types of keystone correction are available: horizontal-vertical keystone and corner adjustment. Keystone correction can also be reset. Keystone correction can be applied by pressing the KEYSTONE button. (P68)

Analog PC-1 Install settings Positional lock Off Image flip H/V None Screen aspect 16:10 Keystone ►Horizontal-vertical keystone Digital image shift Corner adjustment Professional settings Reset Audio in terminal select Screen color Normal On screen Test pattern Off

Horizontal-vertical keystone In this case, horizontal-vertical keystone correction is applied.

Corner adjustment Performs corner adjustment when the KEYSTONE button is pressed.

Reset Resets the specified keystone value.

Pressing the KEYSTONE button when the screen aspect is [16:9 D. image shift] or [4:3 D. image shift] will not apply keystone correction.

Specifying Digital Image Shift

MENU > [Install settings] > [Digital image shift]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

Moves the position of the projected image.

Analog PC-1 Install settings Positional lock Off Image flip H/V None Screen aspect 16:9 D. image shift Keystone Horizontal-vertical keystone Digital image shift Professional settings Audio in terminal select Screen color Normal On screen Test pattern Off

Press the OK button or [▶] button to display the D. image shift adjustment screen.

D.image shift adjustment +0 -

Correct using the [ ]▼ buttons (for 16:9 D. Image Shift) or [ ]▼ buttons (for 4:3 D. Image Shift).

When you have finished correcting, press the OK button.

  • This cannot be selected when the screen aspect is 16:9, 16:10 or 4:3.
  • Vertical image adjustment is available with a screen aspect of [16:9 D. image shift] and horizontal with [4:3 D. image shift].

Specifying Micro Digital Image Shift

CANON XEED WX520 - Specifying Micro Digital Image Shift - 1

[Install settings] > [Professional settings] > [Micro-digital image shift]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB ○

Use this setting to fine-tune digital image shift.

Professional settings Micro-digital image shift ▶ Off Registration Adjust Fan mode Normal Vertical projection Off Edge blending Off Return

Off Does not perform micro digital image shift.

Adjust Performs micro digital image shift.

Micro-digital image shift Adjust Chart Return

Use the [▼/ [ ] buttons for vertical shift.

Use the [◀]▶buttons for horizontal shift. When you have finished correcting, press the OK button.

When you have completed the adjustment, press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• [Off] is the factory default.
- Select [Adjust] to fine-tune the image position.

Adjusting Image Registration

CANON XEED WX520 - Adjusting Image Registration - 1

[Install settings] > [Professional settings] > [Registration]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB ○

Adjusts colors that are out of alignment. You can adjust red and blue registration independently, relative to green.

Professional settings Micro-digital Image shift Adjust Registration ▶ Off Fan mode Adjust Vertical projection Off Edge blending Off Return

Off Does not perform image registration.

Adjust Performs image registration.

Registration Red Blue Chart Return

When the setting is completed, press the OK button.

When the setting is completed, press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• [Off] is the factory default.
- You can adjust image registration by selecting [Red] or [Blue].

Specifying the Fan Mode

CANON XEED WX520 - Specifying the Fan Mode - 1

[Install settings] > [Professional settings] > [Fan mode]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB ○

Enable suitable cooling by switching the fan mode to the setting for low-or high-altitude (above 2,300 m (7,545.8')) operation.

Professional settings Micro-digital Image shift Adjust Registration Adjust Fan mode Normal Vertical projection High altitude Edge blending Off Return

Normal Setting for use in altitudes lower than 2,300 m (7,545.8').

High altitude Setting for use in altitudes of 2,300 m (7,545.8') or higher.

When the setting is completed, press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• [Normal] is the factory default.

CANON XEED WX520 - Specifying the Fan Mode - 3

Incorrect settings may shorten the useful life of the lamp or other parts.

Specifying Vertical Projection

CANON XEED WX520 - Specifying Vertical Projection - 1

[Install settings] > [Professional settings] > [Vertical projection]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB ○

You can ensure adequate cooling by switching the fan mode to suit upward- or downward-facing installations.

Professional settings Micro-digital Image shift Adjust Registration Adjust Fan mode Normal Vertical projection ▶ Off Edge blending Upward Return Downward

Off Does not alter the fan mode.

Upward Setting for use when the projector faces upward

Downward Setting for use when the projector faces downward

When the setting is completed, press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• [Off] is the factory default.

CANON XEED WX520 - Specifying Vertical Projection - 3

Even if you complete this setting, vertical projection will result in a shorter useful life of the lamp and other parts than horizontal projection.

Selecting the Audio In Terminal

CANON XEED WX520 - Selecting the Audio In Terminal - 1

[Install settings] > [Audio in terminal select]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○

○ Digital PC Analog PC USB ○

You can select the audio in terminal that is used for each input signal (HDMI, Digital PC, Analog PC-1, Analog PC-2, Component).

Audio in terminal select HDMI HDMI Digital PC Audio in 1 Analog PC-1 Audio in 1 Analog PC-2 Audio in 2 Component Audio in 2 Return

Off No audio is output.

Audio in 1Outputs the audio signal that is inputted in Audio in terminal 1.
Audio in 2Outputs the audio signal that is inputted in Audio in terminal 2.

HDMI Outputs the HDMI audio signal. (Only for HDMI)

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• The factory default is as follows.
HDMI [HDMI]
Digital PC [Audio in 1]
Analog PC-1 [Audio in 1]
Analog PC-2 [Audio in 2]
Component [Audio in 2]

Adjusting Colors to Suit the Screen Color

MENU > [Install settings] > [Screen color]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can adjust the color quality of the images projected according to the color of the projection screen.

Analog PC-1 Install settings Positional lock Off Image flip H/V None Screen aspect 16:10 Keystone Horizontal-vertical keystone Digital image shift Professional settings Audio in terminal select Screen color Normal On screen Greenboard Test pattern Adjust

Normal Select this if a standard type of projection screen is used. The images are projected in a light quality similar to that of natural light.

Greenboard Select this if a greenboard (dark green color) is used for the projection screen. The color quality similar to [Normal] is obtained on the greenboard.

Adjust Select this to make detailed adjustment.

The following popup screen will appear.

Adjust Red +0 Green +0 Blue +0

Press the [▼] [ ] buttons to select a color.

[ ] makes the color selected darker.

[ ]makes the color selected lighter.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• [Normal] is the factory default.

Specifying a Menu Position

CANON XEED WX520 - Specifying a Menu Position - 1

[Install settings] > [On screen] > [Menu position]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB ○

You can change the position of menus displayed.

On screen Menu position Guide On Show input status On Overheat warning display Off Menu display time Normal Lamp warning display On Air filter warning display On Split screen ID display On Return

Use the [▲/ [ ]◀[ ] /▼] buttons to move the menu to the desired position.

Menu position Use the pointer button to set menu position. Press OK to close.

After you have moved the menu to the desired position, press the OK button to accept your setting, and then press the MENU or EXIT button.

Showing/Hiding the Guide Screen

CANON XEED WX520 - Showing/Hiding the Guide Screen - 1

[Install settings] > [On screen] > [Guide]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB ○

You can select whether to show or hide the guide screen which explains operations.

On screen Menu position Guide Off Show input status ► On Overheat warning display Off Menu display time Normal Lamp warning display On Air filter warning display On Split screen ID display On Return

Off Hides the guide screen.

On Shows the guide screen.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• The factory default is [On].
• The guide screen is shown at the following times.
- When no input signal can be detected. (P145)
- When an invalid button is pressed in the [BLANK], [FREEZE] or [D.ZOOM] mode. (P76, P78)
- When the positional lock is set to [On]. (P146)
- When the projector is already on and the POWER button is pressed again.

Showing/Hiding Input Status

CANON XEED WX520 - Showing/Hiding Input Status - 1

[Install settings] > [On screen] > [Show input status]

○ HDMI Component LAN
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can select whether the signal status is displayed on the screen when there is no signal or when making signal settings.

On screen Menu position Guide Show input status Overheat warning display Menu display time Lamp warning display Air filter warning display Split screen ID display Return On Off On Normal On On

Off The input status is not displayed.

On The input status is displayed.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• The factory default is [On].

Showing/Hiding Overheat Warnings

CANON XEED WX520 - Showing/Hiding Overheat Warnings - 1

[Install settings] > [On screen] > [Overheat warning display]

○ HDMI Component LAN
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can select whether or not to display the [High temperature warning] icon when the temperature inside the projector has increased and is approaching the overheat temperature.

On screen Menu position Guide On Show input status On Overheat warning display ▶ Off Menu display time On Lamp warning display On Air filter warning display On Split screen ID display On Return

Off The [High temperature warning] icon is not displayed.

On The [High temperature warning] icon is displayed.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

When [On] is set, the [High temperature warning] icon shown below will be displayed when the temperature inside the projector is abnormally high.

Screen

• [Off] is the factory default.

Specifying the Menu Display Time

CANON XEED WX520 - Specifying the Menu Display Time - 1

[Install settings] > [On screen] > [Menu display time]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB ○

The setting for the menu display time can be extended from the normal 10 or 30 seconds to 3 minutes.

On screen Menu position Guide On Show input status On Overheat warning display Off Menu display time ▶ Normal Lamp warning display Extended Air filter warning display On Split screen ID display On Return

Normal The menu is displayed for 10 or 30 seconds.

Extended The menu is displayed for 3 minutes.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• [Normal] is the factory default.
- The following display and operation are also changed.

Item [Normal][Extended]
The display time of the following screens-MENU screen30 seconds3 minutes
-Input (P54)-Keystone adjustment (P68)-Keystone reset (P70)-D.image shift adjustment (P63, P64)-D.image shift reset (P65)-Aspect (P67)-Image Mode (P71)-Volume adjustment (P77)-Gamma correction (P100)10 seconds3 minutes

Showing/Hiding Lamp Replacement Warnings

CANON XEED WX520 - Showing/Hiding Lamp Replacement Warnings - 1

[Install settings] > [On screen] > [Lamp warning display]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB ○

A message that advises you to change the lamp can be set to display when the lamp has been used for the specified period of time.

On screen Menu position Guide On Show input status On Overheat warning display Off Menu display time Normal Lamp warning display Off Air filter warning display ▶ On Split screen ID display On Return

On The prepare lamp message and the lamp warning are displayed.

Off The prepare lamp message and the lamp warning are not displayed. When it is time to replace the lamp, the LAMP indicator on the projector will flash, and lamp replacement (P202) is recommended at this time.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• The factory default is [On].

Showing/Hiding Filter Cleaning Warnings

CANON XEED WX520 - Showing/Hiding Filter Cleaning Warnings - 1

[Install settings] > [On screen] > [Air filter warning display]

○ HDMI Component LAN
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

A message advising you to perform cleaning can be set to display when the filter needs cleaning.

On screen Menu position Guide On Show input status On Overheat warning display Off Menu display time Normal Lamp warning display On Air filter warning display Off Split screen ID display ▶ On Return

Off The air filter warning is not displayed.

On The air filter warning is displayed.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• The factory default is [On].

Showing/Hiding Split-Screen ID

CANON XEED WX520 - Showing/Hiding Split-Screen ID - 1

[Install settings] > [On screen] > [Split screen ID display]

○ HDMI Component LAN
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

Specify whether to show or hide the digit (1 or 2) that identifies screens in split-screen mode. Note that even if you select [Off], a marker will be displayed in the corner of the screen to identify the screen that has control rights.

On screen Menu position Guide On Show input status On Overheat warning display Off Menu display time Normal Lamp warning display On Air filter warning display On Split screen ID display Off Return ▶ On

Off Hides the screen ID.

On Shows the screen ID.

When you have completed the adjustment, press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• The factory default is [On].

Showing/Hiding the Test Pattern

CANON XEED WX520 - Showing/Hiding the Test Pattern - 1

[Install settings] > [Test pattern]

○ HDMI Component LAN
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB

You can project a test pattern (P291) to check resolution, color, and other details even without supplying an input signal.

Analog PC-1 Install settings Positional lock Off Image flip H/V None Screen aspect 16:10 Keystone Horizontal–vertical keystone Digital image shift Professional settings Audio in terminal select Screen color Normal On screen Test pattern Off On

Off The test pattern is not displayed.

On Displays the test pattern.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• [Off] is the factory default.
- During test pattern display, you can use the
[▼/ [ ]▼buttons to switch test patterns.
Additionally, if a test pattern has option settings, you can change the settings using the [ ] buttons. (P291)
- The test pattern can also be displayed or turned off by pressing the TEST PATTERN button on the remote control.

Projecting from Multiple Projectors at Once (Edge Blending)

CANON XEED WX520 - Projecting from Multiple Projectors at Once (Edge Blending) - 1

[Install settings] > [Professional settings] > [Edge blending]

○ HDMI Component LAN ○
○ Digital PC Analog PC USB ○

Overlapping edges of images from multiple projectors used together can be blended to make the overall image more seamless.

CANON XEED WX520 - Projecting from Multiple Projectors at Once (Edge Blending) - 2

natural_image Diagram showing a projector and a cityscape with two devices, no text or symbols present

■ Basic Instructions

Follow these steps when using two projectors side by side.

1In the [Install settings] menu, select [Professional settings] > [Edge blending].
2Select [Adjust].

Professional settings Micro-digital image shift Adjust Registration Adjust Fan mode Normal Vertical projection Off Edge blending Off Return ▶Adjust

The edge blending window is displayed.

Edge blending Left Off Right Off Top Off Bottom Off Black level adjustment Off Reset Return

Here, you can use the following settings in the edge blending menu.

Off Does not blend overlapping areas.

Adjust Displays the menu for blending overlapping areas.

Left, Right, Top, Bottom

Off Projects an image with no correction.
Adjust Marker Off Hides the markers.
On Displays markers showing the adjustable blending area, with one line indicating the start position (in red) and another, the end position (in green).
Start position Moves the marker for the start position.
Width Specifies the width between the start and end markers.
Reset Resets the marker settings.

Black level adjustment Adjusts the black level of non-overlapping image areas. (P162)

Reset Resets any adjustments you have made.

CANON XEED WX520 - Installation-Related Menu Settings - 1

  • If you have already completed edge blending settings, selecting [Adjust] will apply them.
  • To restore the default settings before adjustment, select [Reset].

3Select the position where the images overlap.

When you are adjusting the left image, this area is along the right edge of the image. In the edge blending window, select [Right] > [Adjust].

Left image
Overlapping area

Right image

Edge blending Left Off Right Off Top ▶Adjust Bottom Off Black level adjustment Off Reset Return

4Set [Marker] to [On].

Marker lines are projected on the images. The red marker indicates the start position for adjustment, and the green marker, the end position.

Edge blending (Right) Marker Off Start position ► On Width 0 Reset Return

CANON XEED WX520 - 4Set [Marker] to [On]. - 2

By default, the green and red markers are displayed in the same position, so only the red marker is visible.

5Select [Start position] and use the remote's [ ] [ ] buttons to move the markers to the right edge where the images overlap.
6Select [Width], and use the remote's [ ] [ ] buttons to move the markers to the overlapping area.

The area between the starting and ending markers is called the blending area. Brightness of this area is automatically adjusted to match the brightness of other image areas. After you complete settings for the left image, do the same thing for the right image, to specify the blending area along the left edge. Adjust the area so that the blending area for the left and right images is the same.

CANON XEED WX520 - 4Set [Marker] to [On]. - 3

Specifying a large blending area may cause dialog boxes for input signal selection or status to be covered by the blending area. In this case, momentarily switch edge blending from [Adjust] to [Off], check the display, and then return the setting to [Adjust].

CANON XEED WX520 - 4Set [Marker] to [On]. - 4

Although the starting marker is normally aligned with the image edge, it can also be aligned more toward the center of the image. In this case, the black blending area will lie outside of the starting marker.

7 Set [Marker] to [Off].

Edge Blending with Four Projectors

CANON XEED WX520 - Edge Blending with Four Projectors - 1

natural_image Pure geometric diagram with intersecting lines and a diagonal line, no text or symbols present

Images from four projectors can also be blended, as shown at left.

Specify the blending area where each image overlaps with others.

Example: When specifying the blending area for the

lower-right image, configure the settings for blending areas along the top and left image edges.

Complete the settings for the other three images the same way for the edges that overlap.

■ Advanced Instructions: Black Level Adjustment

In overlapping projection, dark colors are projected with less intensity than other colors in the overlapping area. For this reason, overlapping image areas might be more noticeable when the images themselves are dark. You can make this overlapping area less distracting by adjusting the black level of non-overlapping image areas.

Left image Right image

Area where dark colors look lighter Position of end marker (hidden) D-area Blending area

Here, the non-overlapping image area (from the end marker toward the center of the image) is called area "D."

Normally, three areas are identified in the context of end markers: A, B, and C. In the following instructions, only area D is adjusted, and the widths of A, B, and C are left at the default value of 0.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Advanced Instructions: Black Level Adjustment - 2

  • To prepare for adjustment, set [No signal screen] to [Black], start projection with no input signal, and turn off the room lights, so that you can check dark image areas. (P109)
  • Set [Marker] to [Off].

1 On the edge blending screen of step 2 in "Basic Instructions" (P159), select [Black level adjustment] > [Adjust].

Edge blending Left Off Right Adjust Top Off Bottom Off Black level adjustment Off Reset ▶Adjust Return

The black level adjustment window is projected.

Here, you can use the following settings in the edge blending menu.

Black level adjustmentAdjust the black level of non-overlapping image areas.
Off
Adjust
Adjustment typeBlack level
D-area base Adjust the area D black level.
D-area red Adjust the red component of the area D black level.
D-area green Adjust the green component of the area D black level.
D-area blue Adjust the blue component of the area D black level.

2Select [Adjustment type] > [Black level].

Black level adjustment Adjustment type Area Side ▶ Black level A-width 0 B-width 0 C-width 0 Return

3Select [D-area base], and use the remote's [ ] [◀ buttons to adjust the values for area D.

Black level adjustment Adjustment type Black level B-area base 0 B-area red +0 B-area green +0 B-area blue +0 D-area base 0 D-area red +0 D-area green +0 D-area blue +0 Return

As you watch the image, adjust the values so that the brightness and colors of the blending area and area D match. Adjust [D-area base] to lighten the black level, and adjust [Red], [Green], and [Blue] to obtain an optimal black level color tone, as needed.

4 Repeat this adjustment on all projectors.

■ Advanced Instructions: Smoother Overlapping Areas

Adjustments to areas A, B, and C may make the black level along the right edge of area D (that is, the edge bordering the blending area) more noticeable than that of surrounding areas.

To compensate, adjust each area as follows.

Left image Position of end marker (hidden) Area A: Black level cannot be adjusted. Area B: Adjust to a black level different from that of area D. Area C: Adjust to provide a smooth transition relative to the black levels of areas B and D. CBA D-area Blending area Areas C–A (default: 0)

Black level adjustmentAdjust the black level of non-overlapping image areas.
Off
Adjust
Adjustment type
Area
Side On the image for adjustment, select the edge to adjust (left/right/top/bottom).
A-Width Adjusts the width of area A
B-Width Adjusts the width of area B
C-Width Adjusts the width of area C

When there are multiple blending areas relative to the projected image (on all edges), you must adjust the width of areas A, B, and C. In this example, instructions are given for adjusting area B.

1In the window of step 2 in “Advanced Instructions: Black Level Adjustment” (P162), select [Adjustment type] > [Area] > [Side] > [Right].

Black level adjustment Adjustment type Area Side Left A-width ► Right B-width Top C-width Bottom Return

2Select [B-width], and use the remote's [ ] [◀] buttons to specify the width of area B.

This will make the width of area D narrower.

Black level adjustment Adjustment type Area Side Right A-width 0 B-width 0 C-width 0 Return

3Adjust the width of area B to roughly match the area where the black level is noticeable, and then use the following edge-blending settings to adjust the black level of area B.

Adjust the black level of area B the same way as you adjusted it for area D.

Black level

B-area base Adjust the area B black level.

B-area red Adjust the red component of the area B black level.

B-area green Adjust the green component of the area B black level.

B-area blue Adjust the blue component of the area B black level.

For adjustment instructions, see "Advanced Instructions: Black Level Adjustment" (P162), step 3.

CANON XEED WX520 - 3Adjust the width of area B to roughly match the area where the black level is noticeable, and then use the following edge-blending settings to adjust the black level of area B. - 1

Results of adjusting the black level of area B are applied to all sides.

4Fine-tune the position and width of area B.

5As you watch the image, adjust the width of areas A, B, and C.

6Readjust the black level of area B, as needed.

7 When you have completed the adjustment, press the MENU or EXIT button.

• [Off] is the factory default.

CANON XEED WX520 - When you have completed the adjustment, press the MENU or EXIT button. - 1

However, adjusting [Contrast], [Screen color], or other settings may not eliminate distractions in image boundaries.

CANON XEED WX520 - When you have completed the adjustment, press the MENU or EXIT button. - 2

  • To simplify adjustment, use the same lens shift position and image mode (ideally, [sRGB]) on each projector.
  • For best edge-blending results, perform the following adjustments.

(1) Black and white adjustment by adjusting R/G/B gain and offset (P101)

(2) Gamma adjustment by fine-tuning gamma (P105)

(3) Color adjustment by using 6-axis color adjustment (P104)

- To reduce distracting colors or differences in brightness where images overlap, try darkening images by adjusting [Contrast] (or other [Image adjustment] menu settings) or [Screen color].

Connecting to a Network

Table of Contents

Safety Instructions

Before Use

Operation

Projecting an Image

Useful Functions Available During a Presentation

Setting Functions from Menus

Installation and Maintenance

Installation

Connecting to a Network

Maintenance

Networked Multi-Projection

Networked Multi-Projection Overview

Operation in Each Mode

Functions in All Modes

Appendix

Other Information

Index

Network Connection Overview

Connecting the projector to a network enables you to control the projector from a computer and receive notification of projector errors via email. Settings related to the network connection can be made from either the projector side (P169) or computer side. (P178)

Depending on the method of network connection, preparation on the computer side may be necessary. The following is an explanation of preparation on the computer side.

CANON XEED WX520 - Network Connection Overview - 1

For details on networked multi-projection – projecting images from computers through one or more projectors over a network – see “Networked Multi-Projection.”

Connection Methods

Connect the projector to the computer via LAN.

CANON XEED WX520 - Connection Methods - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Router"] --> B["Switch"]
    B --> C["Laptop"]
    C --> D["Data Flow Arrow"]
    D --> E["Laptop"]
    D --> F["Laptop"]

Projector LAN cable (shielded twisted pair)
Hub or router, etc.
(not included) (crossover or straight cable)

  • When the [Network function] setting of the projector is set to [Off] (Network Connections is disabled), switch it to [On] to enable it. (P171)
  • Referring to “Checking Projector Information” (P122), check that the projector IP address does not overlap with other computers that are on the same LAN. To set a projector IP address, follow the instructions in “Completing Computer Settings” (P178) and use the web screen, or use projector TCP/IP settings. (P174)
  • When you connect the computer to the network for the first time, it is also necessary to perform settings on the computer. In this case, consult the network administrator regarding the necessary settings.

CANON XEED WX520 - Connection Methods - 2

In a network environment where a DHCP server is operating, choose [On] on the projector [DHCP] screen to enable the DHCP function and connect it. (P174)

Completing Projector Settings

From the projector menus screen, network settings can be configured in the [Network Setting] tab. For instructions on menu operations, refer to "Using Menus". (P84)

Locking/Unlocking Network Settings

MENU > [Network Settings] > [Network settings lock]

You can lock/unlock the network settings so that they cannot be changed.

Analog PC-1 Network settings Network settings lock Unlock Network password setting ►Lock Register network password Network function (wired) Off Network standby settings Detailed settings (wired) IP address (wired) PJLink AMX Device Discovery Crestron RoomView

Unlock Cancels the lock and allows other network settings to be changed. The password must be entered in order to cancel the lock. Selecting [Unlock] will display the following window. Use the [✗] / [◀] buttons to enter the 4-digit password.

Network password input Enter network password.

Lock Lock the settings.

Press the OK button to accept your setting, and then press the MENU button or EXIT button to close the window. The settings are now locked again. If you change the network settings, be sure to continue operating without closing the window.

• [Lock] is the factory default.
• The factory default network password is []▲

CANON XEED WX520 - Locking/Unlocking Network Settings - 3

Forcibly canceling the network lock

On the Network password input screen, press the buttons in the following order to unlock the settings: [▲[OK] [ ]▶OK] [ ] ▼ [OK]. This will reset the network p a s s w▲o▲r ▲ ▲ o [ ]

Enabling/Disabling the Network Password

MENU > [Network settings] > [Network password setting]

You can set whether or not a password is required in order to change the projector network settings.

Analog PC-1 Network settings Network settings lock Unlocked Network password setting Off Register network password On Network function (wired) Off Network standby settings Detailed settings (wired) IP address (wired) PJLink AMX Device Discovery Crestron RoomView

Off A network password is not used.

On A network password is used.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• The factory default is [On].

Registering a Network Password

CANON XEED WX520 - Registering a Network Password - 1

[Network settings] > [Register network password]

Register the projector network password.

Analog PC-1 Network settings Network settings lock Unlocked Network password setting On Register network password Network function (wired) Off Network standby settings Detailed settings (wired) IP address (wired) PJLink AMX Device Discovery Crestron RoomView

When [Register network password] is selected, the window shown below appears.

Enter a 4-digit password.

Enter the password using the [▼/ [ ]▲[◀/ [ ]buttons on the remote control.

Register network password Enter new password. * * * * Cancel

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

- If you forget the password, press [ ][OK] [▶[OK] [ ] [OK] to restore the factory default setting.

Enabling/Disabling Wired Network Functions

CANON XEED WX520 - Enabling/Disabling Wired Network Functions - 1

[Network settings] > [Network function (wired)]

You can turn the projector network function on or off. Power can be saved by turning the function [Off].

Analog PC-1 Network settings Network settings lock Unlocked Network password setting On Register network password Network function (wired) ▶ Off Network standby settings On Detailed settings (wired) IP address (wired) PJLink AMX Device Discovery Crestron RoomView

Off Disables the network function.

On Enables the network function.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• [Off] is the factory default.

Specifying Standby Power Consumption

CANON XEED WX520 - Specifying Standby Power Consumption - 1

[Network settings] > [Network standby settings]

Specify network function operating status in standby mode as follows.

Analog PC-1 Network settings Network settings lock Unlocked Network password setting On Register network password Network function (wired) On Network standby settings Normal Detailed settings (wired) ▶ Low-power IP address (wired) 192, 168, 254, 254 PJLink On AMX Device Discovery Off Crestron RoomView Off

Normal All network functions are available even in standby mode, including the web screen, control over the network, and PJLink.

Low-power All network functions are available even in standby mode. However, the projector may be less responsive than usual when some functions are initially used.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

  • [Low-power] is the factory default.
  • [Low-power] may delay access over the network for some functions. For faster access, select [Normal].
  • Power consumption when [Network function (wired)] is [On] varies depending on whether [Network standby settings] is set to [Normal] or [Low-power].

Viewing the IP Address

CANON XEED WX520 - Viewing the IP Address - 1

[Network settings] > [Detailed settings (wired)] > [IP address]

View the projector's IP address as follows.

Note that the information can only be displayed, not changed.

To change the settings, access the DHCP or TCP/IP settings.

Detailed settings (wired) IP address 192 . 168 . 254 . 254 Gateway address 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 MAC address 00:00:00:00:00:00 DHCP Off TCP/IP setting Network setting initialization Return

Viewing the Gateway Address

CANON XEED WX520 - Viewing the Gateway Address - 1

[Network settings] > [Detailed settings (wired)] > [Gateway address]

View the projector's gateway address as follows.

Note that the information can only be displayed, not changed.

Detailed settings (wired)
IP address192 . 168 . 254 . 254
Gateway address0 . 0 . 0 . 0
MAC address00:00:00:00:00:00
DHCPOff
TCP/IP setting
Network setting initialization
Return

Viewing the MAC Address

CANON XEED WX520 - Viewing the MAC Address - 1

[Network settings] > [Detailed settings (wired)] > [MAC address]

View the projecto's MAC address as follows.

Note that the information can only be displayed, not changed.

Detailed settings (wired)
IP address192 . 168 . 254 . 254
Gateway address0 . 0 . 0 . 0
MAC address00:00:00:00:00:00
DHCPOff
TCP/IP setting
Network setting initialization
Return

Enabling/Disabling DHCP

CANON XEED WX520 - Enabling/Disabling DHCP - 1

[Network settings] > [Detailed settings (wired)] > [DHCP]

You can turn the projector DHCP function on or off.

Detailed settings (wired) IP address 192 . 168 . 254 . 254 Gateway address 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 MAC address 00:00:00:00:00:00 DHCP ▶Off TCP/IP setting On Network setting initialization Return

Off Disables the DHCP function. TCP/IP settings are possible.

On Enables the DHCP function. Searches the DHCP server. Because the IP address is acquired from the DHCP server, it is not necessary to enter the TCP/IP settings (IP address, subnet mask, gateway address).

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• [Off] is the factory default.

Specifying TCP/IP Settings

CANON XEED WX520 - Specifying TCP/IP Settings - 1

[Network settings] > [Detailed settings (wired)] > [TCP/IP setting]

Configure the projector TCP/IP settings.

Detailed settings (wired) IP address 192 . 168 . 254 . 254 Gateway address 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 MAC address 00:00:00:00:00:00 DHCP Off TCP/IP setting Network setting initialization Return

When [TCP/IP setting] is selected, the window shown below appears. Use the [A/ [ ]▼buttons to select the IP address, then press the OK button.

Next, use the [ ]/ [ ] buttons to select the digit and the [ ]/ [ ] buttons to change the value.

Press the OK button, then set the subnet mask and gateway address in the same way. Finally, select [Enter].

TCP/IP setting Enter network address. IP address 192 . 168 . 254 . 254 Subnet mask 255 . 255 . 255 . 0 Gateway address 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 Enter

• The factory default settings are as follows. IP address: 192.168.254.254
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Gateway address: 0.0.0.0
- Settings cannot be made when [DHCP] (P174) is [On].
- If an invalid value is entered, the message "Invalid entry" appears. If this occurs, enter a valid value.

Initializing Network Settings

CANON XEED WX520 - Initializing Network Settings - 1

[Network settings] > [Detailed settings (wired)] > [Network setting initialization]

You can initialize the projector network settings.

Detailed settings (wired) IP address 192 . 168 . 254 . 254 Gateway address 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 MAC address 00:00:00:00:00:00 DHCP Off TCP/IP setting Network setting initialization Return

When [Network setting initialization] is selected, the window shown below appears. Select [Yes] then press the OK button.

Network setting initialization Initialize network settings? Yes No

• The following items are initialized.

  • Settings used for web login, such as the network setting screen, user name, password, and other settings
  • Network password setting
  • Network function (wired)
  • Network standby settings
  • Register network password
  • PJLink
  • DHCP
  • IP address
  • Subnet mask
  • Gateway address
  • E-mail sender address
  • E-mail recipient address
  • Projector name
  • Location
  • AMX Device Discovery settings
  • Crestron RoomView settings

CANON XEED WX520 - Specifying PJLink Settings - 1

[Network settings] > [PJLink]

You can turn the PJLink network function on or off. When the function is turned on, control is possible via the LAN using commands that meet PJLink standards.

Analog PC-1 Network settings Network settings lock Unlocked Network password setting On Register network password Network function (wired) On Network standby settings Low-power Detailed settings (wired) IP address (wired) 192. 168. 254. 254 PJLink Off AMX Device Discovery ▶ On Crestron RoomView Off

Off Disables the PJLink function.

On Enables the PJLink function.

Press the OK button to accept your setting and then press the MENU button or EXIT button.

• [On] is the factory default.
- This projector conforms to Class 1 as defined in the PJLink standards of the JBMIA (Japan Business Machine and Information System Industries Association). This projector supports all commands that are defined by PJLink Class 1, and has been verified as conforming to the PJLink standard Class 1 definition.
- For information about using PJLink, refer to "Setting PJLink [PJLink]" (P191).

In September 2003, the PJLink Working Group was established under the Data Projector Committee. During the first year, this PJLink Working Group standardized PJLink as a new interface specification for projectors.

PJLink is a unified standard for operation and control of projectors. It allows centralized control of projectors and operation from a controller for all projectors regardless of manufacturer. The objective is for JBMIA to improve convenience for users and expand the use of projectors through early systemization for network monitoring and control of projectors, which will become the mainstream in the future.

Class 1: Standardization of control and monitoring specifications for basic projector functions Basic projector control: Power control, input selection, etc. Acquisition of projector information and status: Power status, input selection status, error status, lamp use time, etc.

JBMIA: Japan Business Machine and Information System Industries Association. The JBMIA is an organization which was launched in 1960 and changed its name on April 1, 2002.

PJLink website: http://pjlink.jbmia.or.jp/english/

CANON XEED WX520 - What is PJLink? - 1

PJLink is a registered trademark of JBMIA and pending trademark in some countries.

Specifying Use of AMX Device Discovery

MENU > [Network settings] > [AMX Device Discovery]

In a network environment, AMX Device Discovery can be used to enable other equipment to discover the projector. For networks without AMX Device Discovery, select [Off].

Analog PC-1 Network settings Network settings lock Unlocked Network password setting On Register network password Network function (wired) On Network standby settings Low-power Detailed settings (wired) IP address (wired) 192. 168. 254. 254 PJLink On AMX Device Discovery ▶Off Crestron RoomView On

Off Disables AMX Device Discovery.

On Enables AMX Device Discovery. The projector will periodically send out AMX beacon packets over the network.

• [Off] is the factory default.

CANON XEED WX520 - Specifying Use of AMX Device Discovery - 2

For details on AMX Device Discovery, visit the AMX website. http://www.amx.com/

Specifying Use of Crestron RoomView

CANON XEED WX520 - Specifying Use of Crestron RoomView - 1

[Network settings] > [Crestron RoomView]

Crestron RoomView enables centralized management of multiple projectors over a network. For example, projectors can be remotely controlled to troubleshoot issues, check the useful life of lamps, or turn the projectors on or off. Specify whether or not to use Crestron RoomView as follows.

Analog PC-1 Network settings Network settings lock Unlocked Network password setting On Register network password Network function (wired) On Network standby settings Low-power Detailed settings (wired) IP address (wired) 192. 168. 254. 254 PJLink On AMX Device Discovery Off Crestron RoomView ▶ Off On

Off Disables Crestron RoomView.

On Enables Crestron RoomView. A port for RoomView will be opened, and the projector will respond to CIP packets. This enables communication via the RoomView Express/Server application or via Crestron Controller. (P191)

• [Off] is the factory default.

CANON XEED WX520 - Specifying Use of Crestron RoomView - 3

For details on Crestron RoomView, visit the Crestron® website. http://www.crestron.com/

Completing Computer Settings

Specifying an IP Address

Following is an explanation of how to set the PC IP address for each operating system.

Windows 7

1 From the PC [Start] menu, select [Control Panel].
2Click on [Network and Internet], then click on [View network status and tasks].
3From the menu on the left side of the window, click on [Change adapter settings].

4Right-click [Local Area Connection], and open [Properties].

5Select [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)] and click the [Properties] button. Make a note of the original network settings (IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, etc).

6Select [Use the following IP address] and set the IP address and subnet mask.

The factory default IP address for the projector is "192.168.254.254". Set an IP address which is different from this.

Example

IP address: 192.168.254.1

Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability. Otherwise, you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings. Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address: IP address: 192 . 168 . 254 . 1 Subnet mask: 255 . 255 . 255 . 0 Default gateway: . Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses: Preferred DNS server: . Alternate DNS server: . Validate settings upon exit Advanced... OK Cancel

7 When the settings are completed, click the [OK] button and then click the [OK] button on the [Local Area Connection Properties] window to close it.

Windows Vista

1 From the PC [Start] menu, select [Control Panel].
2Click on [View network status and tasks].
3From the menu on the left side of the window, click on [Manage network connections].
4Right-click [Local Area Connection], and open [Properties].
5Select [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)] and click the [Properties] button. Make a note of the original network settings (IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, etc).
6Select [Use the following IP address] and set the IP address and subnet mask.

The factory default IP address for the projector is "192.168.254.254". Set an IP address which is different from this.

Example

IP address: 192.168.254.1

Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Internet Protocol Version 1 (TCP/IPv4) Properties General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability. Otherwise, you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings. Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address: IP address: 192 . 168 . 254 . 1 Subnet mask: 255 . 255 . 255 . 0 Default gateway: . Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses: Preferred DNS server: . Alternate DNS server: . Advanced... OK Cancel

7 When the settings are completed, click the [OK] button and then click the [OK] button on the [Local Area Connection Properties] window to close it.

Windows XP

1 From the PC [Start] menu, select [Control Panel].
2Select [Network and Internet Connections] and open [Network Connections].
3Right-click [Local Area Connection], and open [Properties].
4Select [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] and click the [Properties] button. Make a note of the original network settings (IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, etc.).
5Select [Use the following IP address] and set the IP address and subnet mask.

The factory default IP address for the projector is "192.168.254.254". Set an IP address which is different from this.

Example

IP address: 192.168.254.1

Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability. Otherwise, you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings. Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address: IP address: 132 . 168 . 254 . 1 Subnet mask: 255 . 255 . 255 . 0 Default gateway : . Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses: Preferred DNS server: . Alternate DNS server: . Advanced... OK Cancel

6When the settings are completed, click the [OK] button and then click the [OK] button on the [Local Area Connection Properties] window to close it.

■ Mac OS X

1 Open the Apple Menu and select [System Preferences].
2In the System Preferences window, click [Network] to display the Network window.
3Select [Built-in Ethernet] and click the [TCP/IP] tab. Make a note of the original network settings (IP address, subnet mask, router, DNS server, etc.).

4Create a new network environment and set the IP address and subnet mask.

The factory default IP address for the projector is "192.168.254.254". Set an IP address which is different from this.

Example

IP address: 192.168.254.1

Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Network Show All Location: Automatic Internet Connected Internal Modem Not Connected FireWire Not Connected Status Connected Ethernet is currently active and has the IP address 192.1688.23. Configure: Manually IP Address: 192.168.254.1 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 Router: 192.168.6.1 DNS Server: 192.168.9.95, 192.168.9.96 Search Domains: Advanced... Click the lock to prevent further changes. Assist me... Revert Apply

5Click [Apply] to close the network preference window.

■ Resetting the IP Address Setting of the Computer

Follow the same procedure as for changing the IP address and reset the values to the original values based on the notes taken before the change.

Setting Up the Network

■ Displaying the Network Configuration Screen

1Turn on the computer and projector.

CANON XEED WX520 - 1Turn on the computer and projector. - 1

Network functions are not available for the first 40 seconds after projector startup.

2Launch a web browser, enter "http://(projector IP address)" in the address bar, and press the Enter key.

The projector web screen appears.

Canon WUX450 Projection name Projection01 LOGO MAC address 3CAD/DCAD.8E.67 IP address 192,168,253,254 PowerStatus On LampModeUPower 0 LampModePowerSaver 0 LampTimeConverted 0 FilterTime 1 Network Multiple Projection Download Projector control Settings

The following information is displayed.

Network Multiple Projection DownloadFor downloading the Networked Multi-Projection (NMPJ) program. (P211)
Projector control Displays the projector control screen.
Settings Shows the settings screen.
Projector name The name of the projector on the network
Location The location of projector installation
MAC address The MAC address of the projector
IP address The IP address of the projector
PowerStatus The power status of the projector
LampModeFullPower Lamp operating time in [Full power] lamp mode
LampModePowerSaver Lamp operating time in [Power saver] lamp mode
LampTimeConverted Lamp operating time (converted value)
FilterTime Air filter operating time
AlertError message (if an error has occurred)Temperature abnormalityFaulty lampFaulty cooling fanFaulty air filter unitFaulty power supply

CANON XEED WX520 - 2Launch a web browser, enter "http://(projector IP address)" in the address bar, and press the Enter key. - 2

The factory default IP address is "192.168.254.254". If DHCP settings are used, ask the network administrator for the projector IP address. It is possible to check the IP address from the projector menu.

3Click [Settings] on the web screen.

The password input window appears.

4Enter the user name and password on the password input window, then click [OK].

The factory default user name is "root" and the password is "system".

Connect to 102.168.254.254 SECRET PAGE User name: root Password: ******** Remember my password OK Cancel

The projector settings screen is displayed in the web browser.

WUX450 Projector01 Projector control Back to top Network NMPJ Password Mail Mail auth Send test mail SNMP Projector info. PJLink Crestron Controller Initiate Password User name:%00 4-LS characters New password:**** Confirm new password:**** TCP/IP DHCP OP IP address 192.168.251.254 Submit mask 215.255.251.0 Default gateway 0.3.0.0 OK Cancel

CANON XEED WX520 - 4Enter the user name and password on the password input window, then click [OK]. - 3

To operate the projector from the computer, click [Projector control] (P195).

■ Network Setting

1To access the settings screen, click [Settings] on the web screen in step 3 of "Displaying the Network Configuration Screen" (P181).

WUX450 Projector01 Proprietor control Back to top Network NMPJ Password Mail Mail auth Send test mail SNMP Projector info. PLink Crestron Controller Initiate Password User name coffee 4-15 characters New password ******** 4-15 characters Confirm new password ******** 4-15 characters TCP/IP DHCP QF IP address 392.168.251.254 Subnet mask 398.265.251.0 Default gateway 0.3.0.0 OK Cancel

2Select the function to set from the menu (1), then enter the setting in the displayed field (2) and click [OK] (3).

WUX450 Projector(01) Projector control Back to top Network NMPJ Password Mail Mail auth Send test mail SNAP Projector info. PjLink Crestron Controller To: Cc: From: SMTP server IP address SMTP server port number SMTP server IP address Time zone Mail send internal Mail send time Error report MultiAccount Projector@caner.co.jp 0.3.0.0 25 0.1.0.0 (GMT) Dublin, London, London 10 3 CPF OK Cancel Initiate

(3)

3A confirmation window appears. Check the contents and if they are correct, click [Apply].

WUX450 Projectard01 Node and apply setting: CNT To: MailerAccount Cc: From: Projector@canon.co.jp SMTP server IP address: 0.6.0.0 SMTP server port number: 26 SMTP server IP address: 0.6.0.0 Time zone: (SRT) DUAL LANON, LUNION Mail mixed interval: 10 Mail mixed times: 3 Error report: CP Apply Cancel Network NMPJ Password Mail Mail auth Send test mail SNMP Projector.info PjLink Crestron Controller Initiate

The settings are applied to the projector.

When you select [Network] in the menu, this message is displayed: "Save completed. Please change setting and reconnect."

If you select functions other than [Network], "Save completed" is displayed. Click [Back to top] to return to the top page of the web screen.

WUX450 Projector601 Network NMPJ Password Mail Mail auth Send test mail SNMP Projector info. PJLink Cestron Controller Initiate Back to Top Core completed

Setting Basic Information [Network]

From [Network] in the settings screen, you can log into the web screen and set basic network information. For the setting procedure, refer to “Displaying the Network Configuration Screen” (P181).

WUX450 Projector ID1 Propector control Back to top Network NMPJ Password Mail Mail auth Send test mail SNMP Projector info. P2Link Crestron Controller Initiate Password User nameiert 4.05 characters New password 4.05 characters Confirm new password 4.05 characters TCP/IP DHX2 CIF IP address 192.168.251.254 Cutoff mask 395.266.268.6 Default gateway 0.0.0.0 OK Cancel

Item ExplanationFactory default setting
Password
User name When logging into the web screen, enter the user name in 1-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols (4 - 15 characters).root
New password When logging into the web screen, enter the password in 1-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols (4 - 15 characters).system
Confirm new passwordFor confirmation, enter the same password that you entered in [New password].system
TCP/IP
DHCP Select whether to turn the DHCP function on or off. If the function is on, because the IP address is acquired from the server, it is not possible to enter the [IP address], [Subnet mask], and [Default gateway].OFF
IP address Enter the IP address of the projector in 1-byte numbers.192.168.254.254
Subnet mask Enter the subnet mask in 1-byte numbers.255.255.255.0
Default gateway Enter the default gateway IP address in 1-byte numbers.0.0.0.0

CANON XEED WX520 - Setting Basic Information [Network] - 2

If settings related to TCP/IP were changed, it is necessary to disconnect and reconnect to the network.

If the network subnet mask was changed, select [Subnet mask] in the above screen and set the new subnet mask.

Specifying Networked Multi-Projection Settings: [NMPJ Password]

From [NMPJ Password] in the settings screen, you can specify the items needed for NMPJ authentication. For the setting procedure, refer to "Displaying the Network Configuration Screen" (P181).

WUX450 Projection01 Network NIRPI Password Mail Mail auth Send text mail SNMP Projector info Pjunk Crestron Controller Initiate Projector control Back to top Password 0-15 characters Confirm password 0-15 characters OK Cancel

Item ExplanationFactory default setting
Password Enter the password for networked multi-projection authentication in single-byte alphanumeric characters (0-15 characters).
Confirm password For confirmation, enter the same password as you entered in [Password].

Setting Up Email [Mail]

From [Mail] in the settings screen, you can set the items necessary to send error mails and test mails. For the setting procedure, refer to “Displaying the Network Configuration Screen” (P181).

WLUX450 Projection01 Projector control Back to top Network NMP Password Mail Mail auth Send test mail SNMP Projection info PLink Crestron Controller Initiate To: MailViewAccount Cc: From: Projection@project.org.jp SMTP server IP address: 0.0.0.0 SMTP server port number: 25 SMTP server IP address: 0.0.0.0 Time zone: (SMT) Duble, Labton, London Mail round interval: 19 Mail round time: 3 Error report: OFF OK Cancel

Item Explanation Factory default setting
To:Enter the recipient address for error mails in 1-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols (1 - 63 characters).MailUserAccount
Cc:Enter the CC address for error mails in 1-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols (1 - 63 characters).
From:Enter the sender address for error mails in 1-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols (1 - 63 characters).Projector@canon.co.jp
SMTP server IP address Enter the SMTP server IP address in 1-byte numbers.0.0.0.0
SMTP server port numberEnter the SMTP server port number in 1-byte numbers (1 - 65535).25
SNTP server IP address Enter the SNTP server IP address in 1-byte numbers.0.0.0.0
Time zone Select the time zone where the projector is used.(GMT) Dublin, Lisbon, London
Mail resend interval Enter the interval for resending mail when an error occurred (units: seconds) within the range of 0 - 59 seconds using 1-byte numbers.10
Mail resend times Enter the number of times to resend mail when an error occurred within the range of 0 - 255 using 1-byte numbers.3
Error report Select whether to turn the error mail sending function on or off.OFF

Mail Authentication Settings [Mail auth]

From [Mail auth] in the settings screen, you can configure the settings for authentication of mail that is sent when an error occurs. For the setting procedure, refer to “Displaying the Network Configuration Screen” (P181).

WUX450 Projector001 Projector control Back to top Mail authentication OFF User name: Password: Custom password: POP's name: IP address: POP's name: port number: POP buttons: SMTP response time: OK Cancel Network NMPJ Password Mail Send test mail SNMP Projector info. PLink Ciestron Controller Initialize

Item Explanation Factory default setting
Mail authentication Select the mailauthentication method. If OFF is selected, the other mail authentication settings cannot be changed.OFF
User nameEnter the user name to use for mail authentication in 1-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols (1 - 63 characters).
PasswordEnter the password for mail authentication in 1-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols (1 - 63 characters).
Confirm password For confirmationenter the same password as you entered in [Password].
POP3 server IP address Enter thePOP3 server IP address in 1-byte numbers.0.0.0.0
POP3 server port number Enter thePOP3 server port number in 1-byte numbers (1 - 65535).110
POP before SMTP response timeEnter the SMTP authentication timeout period after POP3 authentication (units: milliseconds) using 1-byte numbers (0 - 9999 milliseconds).300

Sending a Test Mail [Send test mail]

From [Send test mail] in the settings screen, you can send a test mail to the mail address that was set in [Mail]. The settings cannot be changed from this screen.

WUX450 Projector001 Projector control Back to top Network NMPJ Password Mail Mail auth Send test mail SNMP Projector info. PjLink Ciestron Controller Initiate To: MailUserAccount Oc: From: Projector@canon.co.jp Subject: Canon Projector test Send

Item Explanation
To: The recipient address which was set from [Mail] in the settings screen (P186) is displayed.
Cc:The CC address which was set from [Mail] in the settings screen (P186) is displayed.
From:The sender address which was set from [Mail] in the settings screen (P186) is displayed.
Subject: The predetermined mail title “Canon Projector test” is displayed.

SNMP Settings [SNMP]

From [SNMP] in the settings screen, you can configure the settings related to control of projectors which use SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). For the setting procedure, refer to “Displaying the Network Configuration Screen” (P181).

WUX450 Projector001 Network NMPJ Password Mail Mail auth Send test mail SNMP Projector info. P2Link Crestron Controller Initiate SNMP OFF Internet community Password 4-15 characters Custom password 4-15 characters OK Cancel

Item ExplanationFactory default setting
SNMP Select the SNMP function version. If OFF is selected, the SNMP function will be turned off and the other settings in this screen cannot be changed.OFF
Receive community Enter the community name which will receive projector information in 1-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols (1 - 15 characters).
Password Enter the community settings password in 1-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols (8 - 15 characters). It can be set only when the SNMP version is V3.
Confirm password For confirmation, enter the same password as you entered in [Password].

Setting Projector Information [Projector info.]

From [Projector info.] in the settings screen, you can set the names and location names which are used to identify projectors when multiple projectors are installed on the network. For the setting procedure, refer to “Displaying the Network Configuration Screen” (P181).

WUX450 Projector001 Projector control Back to top Network NMPJ Password Mail Mail auth Send test mail SNMP Projector info. PJLink Crestron Controller Initiate Projector name Projector901 Location OK Cancel

Item Explanation Factory default setting
Projector name Enter theprojector name in 1-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols (1 - 63 characters).Canon Projector001
LocationEnter the projector installation location in 1-byte alphanumeric characters and symbols (0 - 63 characters).

CANON XEED WX520 - Setting Projector Information [Projector info.] - 2

Some characters such as # cannot be used for [Projector name] and [Location].

From [PJLink] in the settings screen, you can set the PJLink functions which are the standard for projector management on a network. For the setting procedure, refer to “Displaying the Network Configuration Screen” (P181). For information about PJLink, refer to “What is PJLink?” (P176).

WUX450 Projector001 Network NMPJ Password Mail Mail auth Send test mail SNMP Projector info. PLink Crestron Controller Initiate PLink ON PAN authentication ON Password ****** Confirm password ****** OK Cancel Propector control Back to top

Item ExplanationFactory default setting
PJLink Turn the PJLink functionon or off. If OFF is selected, the PJLink function will be turned off and the other settings in this screen cannot be changed.ON
PJLink authentication Selectwhether to turn the PJLink authentication function on or off. If OFF is selected, [Password] and [Confirm password] cannot be changed.ON
Password Enter the PJLink authenticationpassword in 1-byte alphanumeric characters (1 - 32 characters).system
Confirm password For confirmationenter the same password that you entered in [Password].system

Setting Up a Controller Manufactured by Crestron Electronics [Crestron Controller]

From [Crestron Controller] in the settings screen, you can set parameters for communication via controllers manufactured by Crestron Electronics.

WUX450 Projector401 Projector control Back to top Network NMPJ Password Mail Mail auth Send test mail SNMP Projector info. PjLink Crestron Controller Installs IP ID: 9 IP address: 127.0.0.1 Port number: 4.794 OK Cancel

Item ExplanationFactory default setting
IP ID Specify the controller'sIP ID. 3
IP address Specify the controller'sIP address. 127.0.0.1
Port number Specify the controller'sport number. 41794

Setting Errors

When a setting-related error occurs, the error name is displayed on the screen, and a “!” mark is displayed next to the input field which caused the error.

WUX450 Projector001 Network NMPJ Password Mail Mail auth Send test mail SNMP Projector info. PjLink Crestron Controller Initiate Password setting error Password **** 0-15 characters Confirm password **** 0-15 characters OK Cancel

The error meanings are as shown below.

Error Meaning
Input error A setting outside the valid rangewas set on the settings screen.
Password setting error The set password and confirmation password did not match.
Invalid SMTP The SMTP server IP address has not been set.
System failed to connect SMTP server. Failed to connect to the SMTP server when sending a test mail.
System failed to connect POP3 server. Failed to connect to the POP3 server attempting to send a test mail.
System doesn’t support this auth type.An authentication type was set which is not supported by the server.
System failed to authenticate.Authentication failed attempting to send a test mail.
The system failed to send the test mail.Sending of test mail failed due to a connection failure with the SMTP server or an error which does not ordinarily occur.
Unknown errorUnknown error

Resetting Network Settings to the Default Settings

1 Perform steps 1 - 3 on "Displaying the Network Configuration Screen" (P181) to display the settings screen.

2Click [Initialize].

WUX450 Projector 601 Propector control Back to top Network NMPJ Password Mail Mail auth Send test mail SNMP Projector info. PLink Cestron Controller Password User name: root 4-LS characters New password ***** 4-LS characters Confirm new password ***** 4-LS characters TCP/IP DHCP OP IP address 192.168.252.254 Subnet mask 245.265.263.0 Default gateway 0.0.0.0 Initialize OK Cancel

3A confirmation window appears. Click [OK].

■ Error Notification Mails

The messages shown in the following error list are sent when an error occurs in the projector.

Error list

Errors related to temperatureError name Ttemperature abnormality
Text Thetemperature inside the projector is too high for some reason or the outside air temperature is higher than the specified one.If the problem is inside the projector, check whether the projector is installed and operated normally, turn off the projector to cool its inside, and retry projection. If the same warning occurs again, the projector may be defective.Contact your dealer.
Errors related to the lampError name Ffaulty lamp
Text Thelamp has burnt out. Replace the lamp with a new one.If the same warning occurs again, the lamp drive circuit may be defective. Contact your dealer.
Errors related to the fanError name Ffaulty cooling fan
Text Thecooling fan or another component may be defective.Contact your dealer.
Errors related to the air filterError name Ffaulty air filter unit
Text Theair filter unit is not installed properly.Check whether the air filter unit is installed properly.If it is installed properly, the air filter unit detection switch may be defective. Contact your dealer.
Errors related to the powerError name Ffaulty power supply
Text Thevoltage of part of the power supply is abnormally high or any other problem has occurred in the power supply.Contact your dealer.

Control via the Web Screen

When the projector is connected to a network, it is possible to control the projector from a computer via the network.

1Turn on the computer and projector.

2Launch a web browser, enter "http://(projector IP address)" in the address bar, and press the Enter key.

The projector web screen appears.

CANON XEED WX520 - Control via the Web Screen - 1

The factory default IP address is "192.168.254.254". If DHCP settings are used, ask the network administrator for the projector IP address. It is possible to check the IP address from the projector menu.

3Click [Projector control] on the web screen.

The password input window appears.

4Enter the user name and password on the password input window, then click [OK].

The factory default user name is "root" and the password is "system".

Connect to 102.168.254.254 SECRET PAGE User name: root Password: ******** Remember my password OK Cancel

[Projector control] screen appears.

WUX450 Projector control Back to top Projector name Projector001 3-address 192.168.253.254 Refresh Power On Off Input side Aspect Auto Apply Image mode PhotoRGB Apply Blank On Off Mate On Off Auto PC Apply Split screen Ctrl Apply Split screen control Left Apply

The projector control screen appears. The projector can be controlled from this screen.

Item Explanation
Projector nameThe name of the connected projector is displayed. (P190)
IP addressThe IP address of the connected projector is displayed. (P195)
Refresh Refreshes thedisplayed contents with the most recent information.
Power Turns projectorpower on or off.
Input Select an inputsignal and click [Apply] to change to that input signal. (P53)
AspectSelect an aspect and click [Apply] to change to that aspect. (P66)
Image mode Selectan image mode and click [Apply] to change to that image mode. (P71)
Blank Switches theblank setting on or off. (P76)
Mute Switches themute setting on or off. (P77)
Auto PC Click [Apply]to perform Auto PC adjustment. (P57)
Split screen Select thesetting for split-screen mode and click [Apply] to switch to split-screen projection.
Split screen controlSelect the control rights setting for split-screen mode and click [Apply] to switch the side currently under control.
Information The control results and control error information are displayed at the top of the screen.

5When the operations are finished, click [Back to top] to return the initial web screen.

WUX450 Projector control Back to top Projector name Projector001 IP address 130.168.253.254 Refresh Power On Off Input Inset Apply Aspect Auto Apply Image mode Photo/RGB Apply Blank On Off Hide On Off Auto PC Apply Split screen Ctrl Apply Split screen control Left Apply

Maintenance

Table of Contents

Safety Instructions

Before Use

Operation

Projecting an Image

Useful Functions Available During a Presentation

Setting Functions from Menus

Installation and Maintenance

Installation

Connecting to a Network

Maintenance

Networked Multi-Projection

Networked Multi-Projection Overview

Operation in Each Mode

Functions in All Modes

Appendix

Other Information

Index

Cleaning the Projector

Clean the projector frequently to prevent dust from settling on the surface. A dirty lens may ruin the quality of the projected image.

CANON XEED WX520 - Cleaning the Projector - 1

When cleaning the projector, make sure to turn off the projector, wait until the cooling fan stops, disconnect the power plug from the electrical outlet, and let the projector stand for at least 1 hour. Otherwise, you may get burned because the main unit is very hot immediately after the projector is turned off.

Wipe the projector's main unit softly with a soft cloth.

If the projector is heavily soiled, soak the cloth in water with a small amount of detergent in it, squeeze the cloth thoroughly, and then wipe the projector with it. After cleaning, wipe the projector with a dry cloth.

CANON XEED WX520 - Cleaning the Projector - 2

  • Never use volatile cleaning liquid or benzine, as these may damage the finish of the projector.
  • When using a chemical dust cloth, make sure to read the instructions thoroughly.
  • When cleaning the projector's lens, use a commonly available air blower or lens cleaning paper. The lens surface is easily damaged, so do not use a hard cloth or tissues.

CANON XEED WX520 - Cleaning the Projector - 3

natural_image Line drawing of a hand inserting a component into a device (no text or symbols)

Cleaning and Replacing the Air Filter

Replacing the Air Filter

Follow the procedure below when replacing the air filter.

1 Turn off the projector power and remove the power plug.
2As you press the top and bottom of the air filter cover to release the lock, remove the cover.

3Open the filter cover and remove it.

4Remove the air filter.

CANON XEED WX520 - Replacing the Air Filter - 1

natural_image Illustration of a hand pressing down on a projector case with a gear mechanism (no text or symbols)

CANON XEED WX520 - Replacing the Air Filter - 2

natural_image Illustration of a Canon projector with a hand inserting a gear into the case (no text or symbols present)

CANON XEED WX520 - Replacing the Air Filter - 3

natural_image Illustration of a hand inserting a slot into a Canon projector case (no text or symbols)

5Follow this procedure in reverse to install a new air filter.

CANON XEED WX520 - 5Follow this procedure in reverse to install a new air filter. - 1

  • Handle the air filter carefully. If damaged, the air filter will not work properly.
  • When the lamp is replaced, it is recommend that you also clean or replace the air filter.
  • Contact the Canon Customer Support Center for further information.
  • Replacement air filter part number: RS-FL02
  • This can also be purchased from the Canon website.

Cleaning the Air Filter

The air filter protects the lens and mirror inside the projector from dust and dirt. Should the air filter become clogged with dust, the projector may be damaged since it will block the air flow into the projector and raise the internal temperature of the projector. The following screen is displayed when turning on the projector if the air filter needs to be cleaned (after approx. 300 hours). Clean the air filter if it is displayed.

CANON XEED WX520 - Cleaning the Air Filter - 1

Air filter cleaning Clean the air filter. After cleaning air filter, select "Yes". This message will no longer be displayed. Yes No

  • Only the [◀], [▶], OK and POWER buttons are available while this screen is displayed. (When you press the POWER button, the "Push POWER button again to turn off power." message appears.)
  • When this screen has disappeared after being displayed for 10 seconds, all buttons become operable.

  • Turn the power of the projector off and pull out the power plug.

  • Hook your finger around the air filter handle on the front of the projector and remove the air filter. Use a vacuum cleaner to clean off the dust.
  • If the air filter cleaning screen is displayed when turning on the projector after cleaning the air filter, select [Yes] and press the OK button. The air filter cleaning screen will disappear.
  • This screen is not displayed when [Air filter warning display] is set to [Off]. (P157)

CANON XEED WX520 - Cleaning the Air Filter - 3

Do not rinse the air filter in water, which may damage the air filter and projector.

Replacing the Lamp

When the usage time of the lamp exceeds a certain amount of time, the following message (two types) is displayed for 10 seconds every time the projector is turned on.

2,700 hours to less than 3,000 hours

Lamp replacement Obtain a new lamp. Do you want to display this message again? Yes No

Prepare a new lamp when this screen is displayed.

  • Only the [◀], [▶], OK and POWER buttons are available while this screen is displayed.
  • When you press the POWER button, the "Push POWER button again to turn off power." message appears.
  • When this screen has disappeared after being displayed for 10 seconds, all buttons become operable.
  • This message will not be displayed again if you select [No] in response to the message "Do you want to display this message again?".

3,000 hours or more

Lamp replacement Replace with the new lamp.

If this screen is displayed, replace the lamp by referring to the procedure on page 202.

  • Only the POWER button is available while this screen is displayed.
  • When you press the POWER button, the "Push POWER button again to turn off power." message appears.
  • When this screen has disappeared after being displayed for 10 seconds, all buttons become operable.
  • You can check the usage time of the lamp in [Lamp counter] in the [System settings] menu. (P119)
  • This screen is not displayed when [Lamp warning display] is set to [Off]. (P156)

Replacement Lamp

This projector uses the following lamps.

Lamp part no.: RS-LP08

Contact the Canon Customer Support Center when purchasing a replacement lamp.

CANON XEED WX520 - Replacement Lamp - 1

Precautions when replacing lamps that stop working

If the illumination suddenly stops when the projector is in use or after you turn it on, the lamp may be broken. In this case, never attempt to replace the lamp by yourself. Always request service from the Canon Customer Support Center. Additionally, with ceiling-mounted projectors, the lamp may fall out when you open the lamp cover or while you are attempting to replace it. During replacement, stand to the side of the lamp cover, not directly under it. If the lamp breaks and any glass shards or other pieces get in your eyes or mouth, consult a doctor immediately.

CANON XEED WX520 - Replacement Lamp - 2

When replacing the lamp, turn off the projector, wait until the cooling fan stops, disconnect the power plug from the electrical outlet, and let the projector stand for at least 1 hour. Otherwise, you may get burned because the main unit is very hot immediately after the projector is turned off.

CANON XEED WX520 - Replacement Lamp - 3

  • Be sure to use the specified lamp.
  • Contact the Canon Customer Support Center for further information. This can also be purchased from the Canon website.
  • Do not touch the inner glass surface when you replace the lamp. Doing so may cause deterioration to the projector's performance.
  • Handle lamps with care. Impact or abrasion may cause lamps to rupture while they are in use. If a lamp ruptures, contact the Canon Customer Support Center and follow the instructions in “Precautions when replacing lamps that stop working” (P26).
  • When replacing the lamp, do not remove any screws other than those specified.

Replacing the Lamp

1 Turn off the projector power and remove the power plug.
2Press the lamp cover release button to release the lock.

CANON XEED WX520 - Replacing the Lamp - 1

natural_image Technical illustration of a server rack with heat exchangers and ventilation slots (no text or symbols)

3As you hold down the lamp cover release button, slide the lamp cover toward the back, and then lift the cover to open it.

Release button

CANON XEED WX520 - Replacing the Lamp - 3

As you slide the lamp cover toward the back, be careful not to pinch your fingers between the lamp cover. We recommend using both hands to slide the cover, as shown.

4Loosen the three screws securing the lamp unit.

CANON XEED WX520 - Replacing the Lamp - 4

natural_image Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with mounting holes and internal components (no text or symbols)

5Remove the lamp unit.

CANON XEED WX520 - Replacing the Lamp - 5

natural_image Technical diagram of an electronic device showing internal components and a directional arrow (no text or symbols)

6Follow this procedure in reverse to install a new lamp unit.

7 Turn on the power. Bring up the menu and select [System settings] - [Other settings] - [Lamp counter].

Analog PC-1 System settings User screen settings Auto power-off 15 min. Direct power on On Beep On Key repeat On Key lock Off Remote control channel Independent Motion blur reduction Off HDMI In Auto Language English Other settings Other settings Password settings Off Register password Gamma restore Off Lamp counter Air filter counter Firmware 00.010002 Factory defaults Return

8Select [Reset] - [Yes] to reset the lamp counter.

Lamp counter 3100H Reset Return Lamp counter reset Only do this after changing the lamp. Reset the lamp counter? Yes No

CANON XEED WX520 - Replacing the Lamp - 8

  • We recommend cleaning or replacing the air filter (part no.: RS-FL02) when you replace the lamp.
  • Contact the Canon Customer Support Center for further information.

■ If the Lamp Cover Comes Off

Align the point of attachment on the lamp cover with the groove on the projector and gently push the lamp cover to attach it.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ If the Lamp Cover Comes Off - 1

natural_image Diagram showing a mechanical device with a folded paper and a separate view of a mechanical component with a downward arrow (no text or symbols)

MULTIMEDIA PROJECTOR

WUX450

WX520

WUX400ST

WX450ST

Networked Multi-Projection (NMPJ)

CANON XEED WX520 - Networked Multi-Projection (NMPJ) - 1

natural_image Two white and black cameras with visible lens and control buttons, shown from different angles (no text or symbols on the devices themselves)

Networked Multi-Projection Overview

Table of Contents

Safety Instructions

Before Use

Operation

Projecting an Image

Useful Functions Available During a Presentation

Setting Functions from Menus

Installation and Maintenance

Installation

Connecting to a Network

Maintenance

Networked Multi-Projection

Networked Multi-Projection Overview

Operation in Each Mode

Functions in All Modes

Appendix

Other Information

Index

Introduction to Networked Multi-Projection

■ Projection Over a Network

Networked Multi-Projection (NMPJ) is a projector function enabling projection of computer screens over a local network. Multiple computers and multiple projectors can be connected, for a variety of projection scenarios.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Projection Over a Network - 1

Links computers and projectors via a network connection.

■ Split-Screen Projection of Multiple Images

Images from multiple computers can be projected at once, with the images projected in separate areas of a single screen.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Split-Screen Projection of Multiple Images - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["LAN"] --> B["Laptop 1"]
    A --> C["Laptop 2"]
    A --> D["Laptop 3"]
    A --> E["Laptop 4"]
    A --> F["Laptop 5"]
    G[" projector"] --> H["A C B D"]

Projection of multiple computer screens in split-screen display.

■ Projection of an Image from Multiple Projectors at Once

Images from a single computer can be projected from multiple projectors at once.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Projection of an Image from Multiple Projectors at Once - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Laptop"] --> B["LAN"]
    B --> C1["Projection Box"]
    B --> C2["Projection Box"]
    B --> C3["Projection Box"]
    B --> C4["Projection Box"]

■ Selecting the Projection Monitor

For multi-monitor computers, you can project either the primary or secondary monitor.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Selecting the Projection Monitor - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Laptop"] -->|LAN| B["Protractor"]
    C["1 or 2"] --> D["1 or 2"]

Select the primary or secondary monitor for projection

For each computer, you can select the monitor to project.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Selecting the Projection Monitor - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["LAN"] --> B["Laptop 1"]
    A --> C["Laptop 2"]
    A --> D["Laptop 1"]
    A --> E["Laptop 2"]
    B --> F["1"]
    B --> G["2"]
    C --> H["1"]
    C --> I["2"]
    D --> J["1"]
    D --> K["2"]
    E --> L["1"]
    E --> M["2"]

Select the primary or secondary monitor of each computer

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Selecting the Projection Monitor - 3

  • With some computers, it may not be possible to switch between projection of the primary and secondary monitor.
  • The application responsiveness may decline when many computers and projectors are connected over the network.
  • For computers that support three or more monitors, the monitor used for projection varies depending on the model of computer.

To use the NMPJ function, you must install the NMPJ application. Instructions in this manual are for installation in a Windows 7 environment.

System Requirements

Application system requirements are as follows.

CPU Core 2 Duo P8600, 2.4 GHz or higher (32- or 64-bit)

Memory 1 GB or more

HDD 32 GB or more

Monitor 1024x768 min. resolution

CANON XEED WX520 - System Requirements - 1

Cannot be installed on computers without a minimum resolution of 1024x768. Additionally, operation is not ensured if the resolution is switched to less than 1024x768 after installation.

Operating System

Windows XP Professional SP3

Windows Vista Business SP2

Windows 7(Home/Professional/Ultimate) SP1

* Windows XP and Vista compatibility is limited to 32-bit editions.

* Both 32- and 64-bit editions of Windows 7 are supported.

CANON XEED WX520 - Operating System - 1

  • Operation is not ensured in other operating systems or editions.
  • Menus are in English in all cases, except in Japanese and Simplified Chinese versions of the application.
  • Operation is not ensured in operating systems other than English, Japanese, or Simplified Chinese OSes.
    • Operation is not ensured in Windows 8.

Network In TCP/IP network environments, projectors can be connected to computers via the following LAN connections.

Wired LAN (1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX)

CANON XEED WX520 - Operating System - 2

  • Although the application also supports computer-projector communication over a router, operation is only ensured over one router hop. Additionally, to use Broadcast mode (P249) with projectors in other subnets, the router must support IPv4 multicast routing. Note that the router must be set up to route multicast addresses used by the application.
  • If you are using an Aero style in Windows, this message may be displayed: "Do you want to change the color scheme to improve performance?"

Installation

The application is stored in the projector's internal memory. To install it on a computer, use a web browser on the computer to access the projector and download the application.

CANON XEED WX520 - Installation - 1

  • For instructions on connecting to the computer over a network, refer to "Connecting to a Network" (P167).
  • Double click the installer. The installation startup message, "License Agreement", and the firewall registration confirmation message are displayed in order.

- Click [Yes] to set the Windows Firewall setting automatically and install NMPJ.

- NMPJ is installed even if [No] is clicked; however, the warning message is displayed, indicating that the firewall is required to be set manually. Refer to "Windows Firewall" (P215) for more detailed information on how to set the firewall manually. Depending on the setting of the firewall, it may fail to detect the projector automatically.

1 On the computer, start a web browser and connect to the projector.

For instructions on accessing the projector's web screen with a browser, refer to "Completing Computer Settings" (P178).

Canon WUX450 Network Multiple Projection Download Projector control Settings Projector name Respectant1 Location PNC address DC:AD:DC:ND:DC:DC IP address 192,168,253,254 PowerStatus On LampMode#Power I LampModePowerSever I LampTimeConverted I FilterTime 1

To check the projector's IP address, refer to the [Network settings] tab on the projector, or select [LAN] as the input signal.

2Click [Network Multiple Projection Download].

3Click [Download].

Canon WUX450 Network Multiple Projection Direct Mode A single PC can be projected to a single projection. which contains in Image of the PC's screen. Classroom Mode Images of the screens of multiple PCs can be projected demonstrate by multiple projections. This mode is useful for meetings with a postdeutschmal program driver in Classroom. Loading Mode The screens of multiple PCs can be projected through a multiple projections. The mode is useful for meetings involving particularly or white locations or for free decision formats. Broadcast Mode An image of the server of a single PC can be projected through the link to LIF projections. Download Cancel

4When a confirmation message is displayed, click [Run].

File Download - Security Warning Do you want to run or save this file? Name: NMP1Installer-XXXX.exe Type: Application, 5.97MB From: Run Save Cancel While files from the Internet can be useful, this file type can potentially harm your computer. If you do not trust the source, do not run or save this software. What's the risk?

5If a [User Account Control] message is displayed, click [Yes].

User Account Control Do you want to allow the following program to make changes to this computer? Program name: Universal Installer Windows Verified publisher: Canon Inc. File origin: Hard drive on this computer Show details Yes No Change when these notifications appear

6Next, follow the instructions displayed to complete the installation process.

CANON XEED WX520 - 6Next, follow the instructions displayed to complete the installation process. - 1

  • In Windows 7 and Windows Vista, confirmation or warning messages may be displayed during installation or uninstallation.
    These messages request administrator credentials from the current user. If you are logged in as a user with administrator credentials, click [Yes] (or [Continue]) to continue.
  • Depending on the software, you may not be able to continue without administrator credentials. If you are logged in as a standard user, switch to an administrator account and try again.
  • You may need to restart the computer to complete the installation process. If restarting is requested, be sure to restart the computer.

1Select [Start] > [All Programs] > [Canon NMPJ] > [Uninstall network multiple projection].

Default Programs Desktop Gadget Gallery Internet Explorer Windows Anytime Upgrade Windows DVD Maker Windows Fax and Scan Windows Media Center Windows Media Player Windows Update XPS Viewer Accessories Canon NMPJ Networks Multiple Projection Uninstall network multiple projection Games Maintenance McAfee Startup Back Search programs and files admiral Documents Pictures Music Computer Control Panel Devices and Printers Default Programs Help and Support Shut down

2If a [User Account Control] message is displayed, click [Yes].

User Account Control Do you want to allow the following program to make changes to this computer? Program name: Universal Installer Windows Verified publisher: Canon Inc. File origin: Hard drive on this computer Show details Yes No Change when these notifications appear

3After the confirmation message is displayed, click [OK].

Network Multiple Projection Are you sure you want to delete Network Multiple Projection from your computer? OK Cancel

4After uninstallation is finished, click [OK] when the confirmation message is displayed.

Network Multiple Projection The software has been successfully uninstalled. OK

CANON XEED WX520 - 6Next, follow the instructions displayed to complete the installation process. - 6

You may need to restart the computer to complete the uninstallation process. If restarting is requested, always restart the computer.

5Delete the following folder manually.

Windows XP

C:\Documents and Settings\\Local Settings\Application Data\Canon\NMPJ

Windows Vista

C:\Users\\AppData\Local\Canon\NMPJ

Windows 7

C:\Users\\AppData\Local\Canon\NMPJ

CANON XEED WX520 - Windows 7 - 1

These files are hidden. To view hidden files in Windows Explorer, select [Folder options] > [View] > [Show hidden files, folders, and drives].

From Startup to Shutdown

The procedure from application startup to shutdown is as follows. Example windows shown here are from Direct mode.

CANON XEED WX520 - From Startup to Shutdown - 1

If startup is not possible and a message is displayed indicating that NMPJSystem.dll could not be found, uninstall the application. If restarting is requested, always restart the computer. Reinstall the application and try again. (Do not attempt to install the application over an existing installation. Be sure to uninstall it first.)

1Select [Start] > [All Programs] > [Canon NMPJ] > [Network Multiple Projection].

Default Programs Desktop Gadget Gallery Internet Explorer Windows Anytime Upgrade Windows DVD Maker Windows Fax and Start Windows Media Center Windows Media Player Windows Update XPS Viewer Accessories Cross NVIDIA Network Multiple Projection Uninstall network multiple projection Games Maintenance McAfee Startup Back Search programs and files admiral Documents Pictures Music Computer Control Panel Devices and Printers Default Programs Help and Support Shut down

CANON XEED WX520 - 1Select [Start] &gt; [All Programs] &gt; [Canon NMPJ] &gt; [Network Multiple Projection]. - 2

Windows Firewall

The following alert may be displayed the first time you start the application, depending on your Windows Firewall settings.

To enable communication with projectors, select all check boxes and click the [Allow access].

Windows Security Alert Windows Firewall has blocked some features of CANON Network Multiple Projection on all public and private networks. Name: CANON Network Multiple Projection Publisher: CANON Path: C:\program files\canon\nmp\nmpj.exe ON Network Multiple Projection to communicate on these networks: data networks, such as my home or work network. AC networks, such as those in airports and coffee shops (not recommended cause these networks often have little or no security) What are the risks of allowing a program through a firewall? Allow access Cancel

(Screen from Windows 7)

2If the computer is equipped with multiple network adapters, a selection window is displayed. Click [OK] next to the desired network adapter.

Network adapter Select network adapter. 192.168.50.120 Intel(R) Gigabit CT Desktop Adapter OK 172.27.55.91 Intel(R) 82506DM-2 Gigabit Network ...

CANON XEED WX520 - Windows Firewall - 3

The same three buttons are shown in the upper right of this window and subsequent windows. (Additional buttons are shown on some windows.)

[ View application help.
[ ] minimize the window to the taskbar. To view the window again, click the taskbar icon.
[ X close the window.

3On the mode selection window, click the desired mode.

Network Multiple Projection (1) Direct Mode PC and projector are connected directly Meeting Mode Multiple PJs are connected to multi PCs Max. connected PCs: 10 Max. connected PJs: 6 (2) (3) Classroom Mode One control PC manages protection. Max. connected PCs: 10 Max. connected PJs: 6 Broadcast Mode The PC's desktop is displayed by multiple projectors. Max. connected PJs: 12 (4)

(1) Direct Mode

When one computer is connected to one projector. (P224)

(2) Meeting Mode

When multiple computers are connected to multiple projectors. Useful when showing multiple computer screens during meetings or other events. (P234)

(3) Classroom Mode

When multiple computers are connected to multiple projectors. Gives a single presenter control over the specific computer and projector used for projection. (P245)

(4) Broadcast Mode

When a single computer is connected to multiple projectors. Useful when multiple projectors are installed at various positions in an auditorium to project the same image. (P252)

4 Depending on the mode, you can create, join, or select a projection session.

5Click [Start projecting].

Click [Start projecting] on the window to start projection.

Direct Mode Enter IP address to search for projector or actual projector from list. PJ IP address: 102 . 168 . 50 . 101 Projector A / Room A 102.169.50.101 PW: ***** Start projecting Not projecting

6To stop projection, click [Stop projecting].

Direct Mode Enter IP address to search for projector or selected projector from list. PJ IP address: 102 . 169 . 50 . 101 Projector A / Room A 102.169.50.101 PW : **** Stop projecting 1 1

7 To return to the mode selection menu, click o in the copper right.

Direct Mode • Enter IP address to search for projector or select projector from list. PJ IP address. 192 . 108 . 50 . 101 Projector A / Room A 102.162.50.101 PW **** Start projecting Not projecting 1

8After a confirmation message is displayed, click [Return to menu].

Direct Mode Return to menu Discord settings and rtn to menu. Start Projecting Not Projecting

9To exit the application, click in the upper right of the mode selection menu.

Network Multiple Projection Direct Mode PC and projector are connected directly. Meeting Mode Multiple PJs are connected to multi PCs Max. connected PCs: 10 Max. connected PJs: 6 Classroom Mode Broadcast Mode

■ Projection Sessions

A session consists of all the computers and projectors used in projection. In Meeting and Classroom modes, the first user must create a session for the computers and projectors involved. Other users join the session by selecting it from a list of sessions. In Broadcast mode, users can create a session automatically by selecting a projector.

Operation in Each Mode

Table of Contents

Safety Instructions

Before Use

Operation

Projecting an Image

Useful Functions Available During a Presentation

Setting Functions from Menus

Installation and Maintenance

Installation

Connecting to a Network

Maintenance

Networked Multi-Projection

Networked Multi-Projection Overview

Operation in Each Mode

Functions in All Modes

Appendix

Other Information

Index

Using the Projector in Direct Mode

In this mode, one computer is connected to one projector over the network.

Procedure

1 In the mode selection menu, select [Direct Mode].

Network Multiple Projection Direct Mode PC and projector are connected directly. Meeting Mode Multiple PJs are connected to mult. PCs. Max. connectd PCs: 10 Max. connectd PJs: 6 Classroom Mode One control PC manages projection. Max. connectd PCs: 10 Max. connectd PJs: 6 Broadcast Mode The PC's desktop is displayed by multiple projectors. Max. connectd PJs: 12

2The Direct Mode window is displayed. Click .

CANON XEED WX520 - Procedure - 2

Direct Mode • Enter IP address to search for projector or select projector from list. PJ IP address: 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 Start projecting Not projecting

CANON XEED WX520 - Procedure - 4

To connect to projectors in another subnet, enter the projector's IP address in the [PJ IP address] field and click

3The projector selection menu is displayed. Click the projector to connect to.

Projector A Room A 192.168.50.101 Projector B Room B 192.168.50.102 Projector C Room C 192.168.50.103 Projector D

CANON XEED WX520 - 3The projector selection menu is displayed. Click the projector to connect to. - 2

For details on the projector selection menu, refer to "Using the Projector Selection Menu" (P258).

4The Direct Mode window is displayed again. Click [Start projecting].

Direct Mode Enter IP address to search for projector or select projector from list. PJ IP address: 192 . 168 . 50 . 101 Projector A / Room A 192.168.50.101 PW: **** Start projecting Not projecting

The computer screen is now projected.

CANON XEED WX520 - 4The Direct Mode window is displayed again. Click [Start projecting]. - 2

  • If the [NMPJ Password] setting has been configured on the projector's settings screen (P186), the password is now requested. Enter the password.
  • To stop projection, click [Stop projecting].
  • A BUSY icon ( ) indicates that the projector is not available, whether it is off, in use by other computers, or unavailable for other reasons. The BUSY icon ( ) not updated automatically. To view updated projector status, select or search for projectors again.

Direct Mode Window

Direct Mode (1)(2)(3)(4)(5) Enter IP address to search for projector or select projector from list. PJ IP address: 192 . 168 . 50 . 101 (6) (7) (8) (9) Projector A / Room A 192.168.50.101 PW: ****** (10) (11) Stop projecting (12) (13) (14) (15)

(1) Help

View application help.

(2) Back to mode selection

Return to the mode selection menu.

(3) Compact display

View the window at a compact size. (P274)

(4) Minimize

Minimize the window to the taskbar. To view the window again, click the taskbar icon.

(5) Exit

Return to the mode selection menu.

(6) Projector list

View a list of projectors.

(7) IP address

To connect to projectors in another subnet, enter the projector's IP address here and click (8).

(8) Find projectors

Find the projector with the IP address entered in (7). Results of projector searching are shown in (9).

(9) Projector information

Indicates the name, installation location, and IP address of the projector selected in the list or found after searching by IP address.

(10) Password

Passwords for projectors on which [NMPJ Password] on the projector's settings screen has been configured (P186) must be entered here before projection.

(11) Start

Start projection by the selected projector. During projection, this button is labeled [Stop projecting] and can be clicked to stop projection.

(12) Switch primary/secondary monitor

A number is shown here only when secondary monitor connectivity is activated on the computer. Clicking the number will switch between the primary and secondary monitor.

(13) Blank the projector

Pause projection. Click again to resume projection.

(14) Settings

Display the settings window. (P272)

(15) Projection status

Indicates the projection status.

Using the Projector in Meeting Mode

In meeting mode, multiple computers are connected to multiple projectors. This mode is intended for group meetings where multiple computers are used. Up to ten computers and six projectors can be connected.

Creating a Session

1In the mode selection menu, select [Meeting Mode].

Network Multiple Projection Direct Mode PC and projector are connected directly. Meeting Mode Multiple PJs are connected to mult. PCs. Max. connectd PCs: 10 Max. connectd PJs: 6 Classroom Mode One control PC managee projection. Max. connectd PCs: 10 Max. connectd PJs: 6 Broadcast Mode The PCs desktop is displayed by multiple projectors. Max. connectd PJs: 12

2The session selection menu is displayed. Click [New].

Meeting Mode Select session New Create a new session.

3The projector selection menu is displayed. In the list of projectors at left, click the projector to connect to.

You can select up to 6 projectors. Selected projectors are listed at right.

Projector A Room A 192.168.50.101 Projector B Room B 192.168.50.102 Projector C Room C 192.168.50.103 Projector D Room D 192.168.50.104 Projector E Room E 192.168.50.105 Projector F Room F 192.168.50.106 Projector G Room G 192.168.50.107 • Select PJ frm list Next

CANON XEED WX520 - 3The projector selection menu is displayed. In the list of projectors at left, click the projector to connect to. - 2

  • If the [NMPJ Password] setting has been configured on the projector's settings screen (P186), the password is now requested. Enter the password.
  • To clear a selected projector, click the upper right of that projector listing.
  • For details on the projector selection menu, refer to "Using the Projector Selection Menu" (P258).

4Click [Next].

Projector A Room A 192.168.50.101 Projector B Room B 192.168.50.102 Projector C Room C 192.168.50.103 Projector D Room D 192.168.50.104 Projector E Room E 192.168.50.105 Projector F Room F 192.168.50.106 Projector G Room G 192.168.50.107 Projector A 192.168.50.101 PW: ***** Projector B 192.168.50.102 PW: ***** Projector C 192.168.50.103 PW: ***** Next

5A window for creating the session is displayed. Specify a session name, password, nickname, and desktop (primary or secondary monitor for projection), and then click [OK].

Enter session name and nickname. A session password can be set. Session Meeting A Session password Set Nickname User A Select desktop 1 Projector A 192.168.50.101 PW: **** Projector B 192.168.50.102 PW: **** Projector C 192.168.50.103 PW: **** Cancel OK

CANON XEED WX520 - 4Click [Next]. - 3

  • If you choose to set a session password, other users must enter that password to join the session. To set a password, click [Set] and enter the password.
  • Desktop selection is only available with computers that have dual monitor support.

6The Meeting Mode window is displayed. Select a projector to control from the pull-down list.

Meeting Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A / Room A 192.168.50.101 Drag and drop the PC icon. Start projecting Get layout

7In the list at right, select a computer to use with your designated projector. Drag the computer to a desired position in the layout area.

You can arrange up to four computers as desired in the layout area.

Meeting Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A/ Room A 192.168.50.101 Drag and drop the PC icon. User A User B Start projecting Get layout

8Drag the computers for use in projection in the layout area to rearrange them, as needed.

During projection, screens of each computer will be arranged according to their position in the layout area.

Meeting Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A / Room A 192.168.50.101 User A User B User A Start projecting Get layout

9Click [Start projecting].

Meeting Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A / Room A 192.168.50.101 1 User A User B Start projecting Get layout

Images are now projected from the computers in the layout area.

CANON XEED WX520 - 9Click [Start projecting]. - 2

  • To stop projection, click [Stop projecting].
  • To rearrange the layout during projection, click [Start projecting] again. Note that if you simply rearrange the layout, the new layout will not be applied to projection.

10 To end the session, click 📄 in Ⓧ upper right.

Meeting Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A/ Room A 192.168.50.101 1 User A User B Start projecting Get layout

11 The following confirmation message is displayed. To end the entire session, click [Close]. To leave the session, click [Exit].

Meeting Mode Session: Meeting A • Make a selection Close End the session, rtn Select m. sc. Exit Exit the session, rtn Select m. sc. User B User A Start projecting Get layout

Return to the mode selection menu.

CANON XEED WX520 - The following confirmation message is displayed. To end the entire session, click [Close]. To leave the session, click [Exit]. - 2

[Exit] is not shown unless other computers are connected.

Joining a Session

1 In the mode selection menu, select [Meeting Mode].

Network Multiple Projection Direct Mode PC and projector are connected directly. Meeting Mode Multiple PJs are connected to mult. PCs. Max. connectd PCs: 10 Max. connectd PJs: 6 Classroom Mode One control PC manages projection. Max. connectd PCs: 10 Max. connectd PJs: 6 Broadcast Mode The PC's desktop is displayed by multiple projectors. Max. connectd PJs: 12

2The session selection menu is displayed. Click [Enter] next to the session to join.

Meeting Mode Select session New Session Date/trn Meeting A 2012.11.7 User A 01 03 Enter 16:33

CANON XEED WX520 - 2The session selection menu is displayed. Click [Enter] next to the session to join. - 2

To join a session in another subnet, click and enter the projector's IP address to locate the projector. The application will search for sessions in the other subnet. For details, refer to "Using the Session Selection Menu" (P256).

3A session login window is displayed. Specify the session password, your nickname, and desktop (primary or secondary monitor for display), and then click [OK].

Meeting Mode Select session Enter password and nickname. Session:Meeting A Session password Nickname User B Select desktop 1 Cancel OK

CANON XEED WX520 - 2The session selection menu is displayed. Click [Enter] next to the session to join. - 4

Desktop selection is only available with computers that have dual monitor support.

4The Meeting Mode window is displayed. Next, follow the instructions starting with step 6 in “Creating a Session” (P226).

Meeting Mode Window

Meeting Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A / Room A 192.168.50.101 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) User A User B User C User D Stop projecting Get layout (15) (16)

(1) Help

View application help.

(2) Back to mode selection

Return to the mode selection menu.

(3) Compact display

View the window at a compact size. (P274)

(4) Minimize

Minimize the window to the taskbar. To view the window again, click the taskbar icon.

(5) Exit

Return to the mode selection menu.

(6) Projector list

View a list of projectors.

(7) Projector pull-down list

Lists connected projectors. Your actions on this screen apply to the projector selected here.

(8) Computers

Lists connected computers. To prepare computers for projection, drag them to the layout area. Your own computer is listed first.

In the computer's display position is indicated by a white square.

(9) Blank the computer

Pause projection from the computer. Click again to resume projection.

(10) Settings

Display the setting window. (P272)

(11) Layout area

Drag computers to this area to assign their projection position.

(12) Computers in layout area

Computers here can be dragged to rearrange them. A number is shown here only when secondary monitor connectivity is activated on the computer.

Clicking the number will switch between the primary and secondary monitor.

(13) Blank the projector

Pause projection from the projector. Click again to resume projection.

(14) View information

Project information needed by other users to join the session. The IP address projected is used by one of the projectors in the session.

(15) Start/stop projection

Start projection by the selected projector. During projection, this button is labeled [Stop projecting] and can be clicked to stop projection.

(16) Acquire screen layout

Indicates the layout of the selected projectors.

Using the Projector in Classroom Mode

In classroom mode, multiple computers are connected to multiple projectors. A single presenter can control any computer or projector used for projection, whether their own or those of others in attendance. Up to ten computers and six projectors can be connected.

Leading a New Session

1In the mode selection menu, select [Classroom Mode].

Network Multiple Projection Direct Mode PC and projector are connected directly. Meeting Mode Multiple PJs are connected to mult PCs. Max. connectd PCs: 10 Max. connectd PJs: 6 Classroom Mode One control PC manages projection. Max. connectd PCs: 10 Max. connectd PJs: 6 Broadcast Mode The PC's desktop is displayed by multiple projectors. Max. connectd PJs: 12

2The session selection menu is displayed. Click [New].

Classroom Mode Select session New ← • Create a new session. Session Divelfm Enter Enter Enter

3The projector selection menu is displayed. In the list of projectors at left, click the projector to connect to.

You can select up to 6 projectors. Selected projectors are listed at right.

Projector A Room A 192.168.50.101 Projector B Room B 192.168.50.102 Projector C Room C 192.168.50.103 Projector D Room D 192.168.50.104 Projector E Room E 192.168.50.105 Projector F Room F 192.168.50.106 Projector G Room G 192.168.50.107 Select PJ firm list Next

CANON XEED WX520 - 3The projector selection menu is displayed. In the list of projectors at left, click the projector to connect to. - 2

  • If the [NMPJ Password] setting has been configured on the projector's settings screen (P186), the password is now requested. Enter the password.
    • To clear a selected projector, click the upper right of the projector listing.
  • For details on the projector selection menu, refer to "Using the Projector Selection Menu" (P258).

4Click [Next].

Projector A Room A 192.168.50.101 Projector B Room B 192.168.50.102 Projector C Room C 192.168.50.103 Projector D Room D 192.168.50.104 Projector E Room E 192.168.50.105 Projector F Room F 192.168.50.106 Projector G Room G 192.168.50.107 Projector A 192.168.50.101 PW: ***** Projector B 192.168.50.102 PW: ***** Projector C 192.168.50.103 PW: ***** Next

5A window for creating the session is displayed. Specify a session name, password, nickname, and desktop (primary or secondary monitor for projection), and then click [OK].

Enter session name and nickname. A session password can be set. Session Meeting A Session password Set Nickname User A Select desktop 1 Projector A 192.168.50.101 PW: **** Projector B 192.168.50.102 PW: **** Projector C 192.168.50.103 PW: **** Cancel OK

CANON XEED WX520 - 4Click [Next]. - 3

  • If you choose to set a session password, other users must enter that password to join the session. To set a password, click [Set] and enter the password.
  • Desktop selection is only available with computers that have dual monitor support.

6The Classroom Mode window is displayed. Select a projector to control from the pull-down list.

Classroom Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A/ Room A 192.168.50.101 Drag and drop the PC icon. Start projecting Get layout

7In the list at right, select a computer to use with your designated projector. Drag the computer to a desired position in the layout area.

You can arrange up to four computers as desired in the layout area.

Classroom Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A / Room A 192.168.50.101 Drag and drop the PC icon. User A User B Start projecting Get layout

8Drag the computers for use in projection in the layout area to rearrange them, as needed.

During projection, screens of each computer will be arranged according to their position in the layout area.

Classroom Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A / Room A 192.168.50.101 User B User A Start projecting Get layout

9Click [Start projecting].

Classroom Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A/ Room A 192.168.50.101 User B 1 Start projecting Get layout

Images are now projected from the computers in the layout area.

CANON XEED WX520 - 9Click [Start projecting]. - 2

  • To stop projection, click [Stop projecting].
  • To rearrange the layout during projection, click [Start projecting] again. Note that if you simply rearrange the layout, the new layout will not be applied to projection.

10 To end the session, click 📄 in the upper right.

Classroom Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A/ Room A 192.168.50.101 User A User B Start projecting Get layout

11 The following confirmation message is displayed. Click [Close].

Classroom Mode Session: Meeting A Close End the session, rtn Select m. ac. User B User A Start projecting Get layout

Return to the mode selection menu.

Joining an Existing Session

1 In the mode selection menu, select [Classroom Mode].

Network Multiple Projection Direct Mode PC and projector are connected directly. Meeting Mode Multiple PJs are connected to multi. PCs. Max. connectd PCs: 10 Max. connectd PJs: 6 Classroom Mode One control PC manages projection. Max. connectd PCs: 10 Max. connectd PJs: 6 Broadcast Mode The PC's desktop is displayed by multiple projectors. Max. connectd PJs: 12

2The session selection menu is displayed. Click [Enter] next to the session to join.

Classroom Mode Select session New Session Date/tm Meeting A 2012.11.8 User A 01 03 10:28 Enter

CANON XEED WX520 - 2The session selection menu is displayed. Click [Enter] next to the session to join. - 2

To join a session in another subnet, click and enter the projector's IP address to find the projector. The application will search for sessions in the other subnet. For details, refer to "Using the Session Selection Menu" (P256).

3A session login window is displayed. Specify the session password, your nickname, and desktop (primary or secondary monitor for display), and then click [OK].

Classroom Mode Select session Enter password and nickname. Session:Meeting A Session password Nickname User A Select desktop 1 Cancel OK

CANON XEED WX520 - 2The session selection menu is displayed. Click [Enter] next to the session to join. - 4

Desktop selection is only available with computers that have dual monitor support.

4The Classroom Mode window (for joining a session) is displayed. Users joining sessions cannot change the projection layout or start or stop projection.

Classroom Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A / Room A 192.168.50.101 1 User B User B 1

Using the Projector in Classroom Mode

5To end the session, click o in the upper right.

Classroom Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A / Room A 192.168.50.101 Not projecting User B 1

6The following confirmation message is displayed. Click [Exit].

Classroom Mode Session: Meeting A Exit Exit the session, rtn Select m. ac.

Return to the mode selection menu.

Classroom Mode Window (Starting a Session)

Classroom Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A / Room A 192.168.50.101 User A User B User B 1 Start projecting Get layout (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)

(1) Help

View application help.

(2) Back to mode selection

Return to the mode selection menu.

(3) Compact display

View the window at a compact size. (P274)

(4) Minimize

Minimize the window to the taskbar. To view the window again, click the taskbar icon.

(5) Exit

Return to the mode selection menu.

(6) Projector list

View a list of projectors.

(7) Projector pull-down list

Lists connected projectors. Your actions on this window apply to the projector selected here.

(8) Computers

Lists connected computers. To prepare computers for projection, drag them to the layout area. Your own computer is listed first.

In the computer's display position is indicated by a white square.

(9) Blank the computer

Pause projection from the computer. Click again to resume projection.

(10) Settings

Display the setting window. (P272)

(11) Layout area

Drag computers to this area to assign their projection position.

(12) Computers in layout area

Computers here can be dragged to rearrange them. A number is shown here only when secondary monitor connectivity is activated on the computer.

Clicking the number will switch between the primary and secondary monitor.

(13) Blank the projector

Pause projection from the projector. Click again to resume projection.

(14) View information

Project information needed by other users to join the session. The IP address projected is used by one of the projectors in the session.

(15) Start/stop projection

Start projecting by the selected projector. During projection, this button is labeled [Stop projecting] and can be clicked to stop projection.

(16) Acquire screen layout

Indicates the layout of the selected projectors.

Classroom Mode Window (Joining a Session)

Classroom Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A / Room A 192.168.50.101 User B User B (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (11)(10)

(1) Help

View application help.

(2) Back to mode selection

Return to the mode selection menu.

(3) Compact display

View the window at a compact size. (P274)

(4) Minimize

Minimize the window to the taskbar. To view the window again, click the taskbar icon.

(5) Exit

Return to the mode selection menu.

(6) Projector pull-down list

Lists connected projectors. Your actions on this window apply to the projector selected here.

(7) Layout area

Lists computers selected for projection.

(8) Projection status

Indicates the projection status.

(9) Computer

A number is shown here only when secondary monitor connectivity is activated on the computer you are using. Clicking the number will switch between the primary and secondary monitor.

(10) Blank the computer

Pause projection from the computer. Click again to resume projection.

(11) Settings

Display the setting window. (P272)

Using the Projector in Broadcast Mode

In Broadcast Mode, a single computer is connected to up to 12 projectors.

CANON XEED WX520 - Using the Projector in Broadcast Mode - 1

Before projecting from projectors in other subnets in Broadcast Mode, you must configure the router's multicast routing settings. For details, ask your network administrator.

Procedure

1 In the mode selection menu, select [Broadcast Mode].

Network Multiple Projection Direct Mode PC and projector are connected directly. Meeting Mode Multiple PJs are connected to mult. PCs. Max. connectd PCs: 10 Max. connectd PJs: 6 Classroom Mode One control PC manages projection. Max connectd PCs: 10 Max connectd PJs: 6 Broadcast Mode The PC's desktop is displayed by multiple projectors. Max. connectd PJs: 12

2The projector selection menu is displayed. In the list of projectors at left, click the projector to connect to.

You can select up to 12 projectors. Selected projectors are listed at right.

Projector A Room A 192.168.50.101 Projector B Room B 192.168.50.102 Projector C Room C 192.168.50.103 Projector D Room D 192.168.50.104 Projector E Room E 192.168.50.105 Select PJ firm list

CANON XEED WX520 - Procedure - 3

  • If the [NMPJ Password] setting has been configured on the projector's settings screen (P186), the password is now requested. Enter the password.
  • To clear a selected projector, click the upper right of that projector listing.
  • For details on the projector selection menu, refer to "Using the Projector Selection Menu" (P258).

3Click [Next].

Projector A Room A 192.168.50.101 Projector B Room B 192.168.50.102 Projector C Room C 192.168.50.103 Projector D Room D 192.168.50.104 Projector E Room E 192.168.50.105 Projector F Room F 192.168.50.106 Projector G Room G 192.168.50.107 Projector A 192.168.50.101 PW: ***** Projector B 192.168.50.102 PW: ***** Projector C 192.168.50.103 PW: ***** Next

4The Broadcast Mode window is displayed. Click [Start projecting].

Broadcast Mode Not projecting Start projecting

The computer screen is now projected.

CANON XEED WX520 - 4The Broadcast Mode window is displayed. Click [Start projecting]. - 2

To stop projection, click [Stop projecting].

5To end the session, click o in the upper right.

Broadcast Mode Projecting 1 Stop projecting

6The following confirmation message is displayed. Click [Close].

Broadcast Mode Close End the session, rtn Select m. sc. 1 Stop projecting

Return to the mode selection menu.

Broadcast Mode Window

CANON XEED WX520 - Broadcast Mode Window - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Start projecting"] --> B["Project Icon"]
    B --> C["Project Icon (1)"]
    C --> D["Project Icon (2)"]
    D --> E["Project Icon (3)"]
    E --> F["Project Icon (4)"]
    F --> G["Project Icon (5)"]
    G --> H["Project Icon (6)"]
    H --> I["Project Icon (7)"]
    I --> J["Not projecting"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

(1) Help

View application help.

(2) Back to mode selection

Return to the mode selection menu.

(3) Compact display

View the window at a compact size. (P274)

(4) Minimize

Minimize the window to the taskbar. To view the window again, click the taskbar icon.

(5) Exit

Return to the mode selection menu.

(6) Projector list

View a list of projectors.

(7) Projection status

Shows the projected image status.

(8) Switch primary/secondary monitor

A number is shown here only when secondary monitor connectivity is activated on the computer you are using. Clicking the number will switch between the primary and secondary monitor.

(9) Blank the projector

Pause projection. Click again to resume projection.

(10) Settings

Display the setting window. (P272)

(11) Start

Start projection by the selected projector. During projection, this button is labeled [Stop projecting] and can be clicked to stop projection.

Functions in All Modes

Table of Contents

Safety Instructions

Before Use

Operation

Projecting an Image

Useful Functions Available During a Presentation

Setting Functions from Menus

Installation and Maintenance

Installation

Connecting to a Network

Maintenance

Networked Multi-Projection

Networked Multi-Projection Overview

Operation in Each Mode

Functions in All Modes

Appendix

Other Information

Index

Using the Session Selection Menu

Session Selection Menu

Meeting Mode Select session (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) New Session Date/tm (6) Meeting A 2012.11.7 User A 01 03 16:33 (7) Enter Enter Enter Enter Enter

(1) Help

View application help.

(2) Back to mode selection

Return to the mode selection menu.

(3) Minimize

Minimize the window to the taskbar. To view the window again, click the taskbar icon.

(4) Exit

Return to the mode selection menu.

(5) [New]

Start a new session. (P226)

(6) Find session

Find sessions of projectors in another subnet. (P257)

(7) Session list

Lists the sessions detected. Information shown here includes the session name, creation date, creator nickname, and number of computers and projectors involved.

(8) [Enter]

Join the session. (P232)

Finding Sessions

You can find sessions from the session selection menu.

1In the session selection menu, click .

CANON XEED WX520 - 1In the session selection menu, click . - 1

Meeting Mode Select session New Session Date/tm Meeting A 2012.11.7 User A 01 03 Enter 16:33 Enter Enter Enter Enter

2The search window is displayed. Enter the IP address of a projector in the session to join, and then click find the projector. Once sessions are found, they are listed.

Meeting Mode Select session • Search for session by projector IP address. IP add: 192 . 158 . 50 . 101 Session Date/tm Meeting A 2012 11.8 User A 01 03 Enter 11:15

Using the Projector Selection Menu

Projector Selection Menu

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Sort: Projector A Room A 192.168.50.101 Projector B Room B 192.168.50.102 Projector C Room C 192.168.50.103 Projector D Room D 192.168.50.104 Projector E Room E 192.168.50.105 Projector F Room F 192.168.50.106 Projector G Room G 192.168.50.107 Projector A 192.168.50.101 PW: ***** Projector B 192.168.50.102 PW: ***** Projector C 192.168.50.103 PW: ***** Next

(1) Find projectors

Find projectors in another subnet. (P260)

(2) Sort

Change the sort order of the projector list. (P263)

(3) Help

View application help.

(4) Back to mode selection

Return to the mode selection menu.

(5) Minimize

Minimize the window to the taskbar. To view the window again, click the taskbar icon.

(6) Exit

Return to the mode selection menu.

(7) Projector list

Projectors are listed here. The information shown includes the projector names, installation location, and IP address. Available projectors are indicated by white text.

Gray text indicates that the projector is not available, whether it is off, in use by other computers, or unavailable for other reasons.

Clicking a listed projector will select it for use in the session, and it will be shown in the field at right. Selected projectors are also indicated by gray text.

Available projectors Unavailable projectors Projector B Room B 192.168.50.102 Projector E Room E 192.168.50.105 Projector A Room A 192.168.50.101 Projector C Room C 192.168.50.103 Indicates that the projector is off (Clicking the icon will display the projector's web screen in the browser. (P181))

(8) List of projectors used in the session

Projectors selected in the list at left are shown here. To use password-protected projectors, you must enter the password in the [PW] field.

To remove projectors from this list, click

CANON XEED WX520 - List of projectors used in the session - 1

■ Finding Projectors

To find projectors in other subnets, do the following in the projector selection menu.

1In the projector selection menu, click

CANON XEED WX520 - 1In the projector selection menu, click - 1

Sort Projector A Room A 192.168.50.101 Projector B Room B 192.168.50.102 Projector C Room C 192.168.50.103 Projector D Room D 192.168.50.104 Projector E Room E 192.168.50.105 Projector F Room F 192.168.50.106 Projector G Room G 192.168.50.107 Projector A 192.168.50.101 PW: ***** Projector B 192.168.50.102 PW: ***** Projector C 192.168.50.103 PW: ***** Next

2The search window is displayed. Enter the projector's IP address, and then click 🔒

Enter IP address to search for projector. IP add: 192 . 168 . 20 . 20 192.168.50.104 Projector E Room E 192.168.50.105 Projector F Room F 192.168.50.106 Projector G Room G 192.168.50.107 Next

3Once the projector is found, click [OK].

Enter IP address to search for projector. IP add: 192 168 20 20 Projector X Room X 192.168.20.20 OK 192.168.50.104 Projector E Room E 192.168.50.105 Projector F Room F 192.168.50.106 Projector G Room G 192.168.50.107 Next

The selected projector is now added to the projector list.

■ Selecting Password-Protected Projectors

Selecting a password-protected projector will display a password input field. Enter the password.

Projector C Room C 192.168.50.103 Projector D Room D 192.168.50.104 Projector E Room E 192.168.50.105 Projector F Room F 192.168.50.106 Projector A 192.168.50.101 PW: ****** Projector B 192.168.50.102 PW: ****** Projector C 192.168.50.103 PW: ****** Projector X 192.168.20.20 PW:

■ Using the Favorites Function

You can register commonly used projectors as favorites.

Favorite projectors are listed first when you click the button (sort by favorites). Up to five projectors can be registered as favorites.

To register a projector as a favorite, click the Favorites icon in the projector selection menu.

Projector A Room A 192.168.50.101 Projector B Room B 192.168.50.102 Projector C Room C 192.168.50.103 • Select PJ frm list

The projector is now registered as a favorite, and a star is displayed in the Favorites column.

Projector A Room A 192.168.50.101 Projector B Room B 192.168.50.102 Projector C Room C 192.168.50.103 • Select PJ frm list

■ Resorting the Projector List

You can change the sort order of projector information by clicking the sort buttons.

Projector A Room A 192.168.50.101 Projector B Room B 192.168.50.102 Projector C Room C 192.168.50.103 Projector D Sort: Select PJ frm list

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Resorting the Projector List - 2

List by projector name.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Resorting the Projector List - 3

List by installation location.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Resorting the Projector List - 4

List projectors that are currently on first.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Resorting the Projector List - 5

List favorite projectors first.

■ Turning Projectors On

Projectors currently off are indicated by 📋 the projector selection menu. (These projectors cannot be selected for projection.) You can turn them on by clicking 🔒 display the projector web screen and switching the power on.

Projector B Room B 192.168.50.102 Projector E Room E 192.168.50.105 Projector A Room A 192.168.50.101 Projector C Room C 192.168.50.103

For instructions after this step, refer to "Control via the Web Screen" (P195).

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Turning Projectors On - 2

Once you turn a projector on, you can select it for other operations.

Using Layout Functions

■ Switching Projectors Used for the Layout

On the layout window, you can set up the projection layout.

To choose a different projector for the layout, select it from the projector pull-down list.

Meeting Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A / Room A 192.168.50.101 User A User B

■ Controlling all Projectors at Once

To set up the projection layout for all projectors at once, select [ALL] in the projector pull-down menu.

Meeting Mode Session: Meeting A ALL / 0.0.0.0 Drag and drop the PC icon. User A User B

■ Projecting from Multiple Projectors (Multi-Projection)

In Meeting and Classroom Modes, separate images from multiple projectors can be projected together. This is called “multi-projection.” On the layout window for Meeting or Classroom Modes, you can set up the projection layout for each projector used.

1 On the layout window for Meeting or Classroom Modes, specify the projection layout for each projector.

In the layout area, drag the computer to use in projection, and then click [Start projecting] to start projection.

Meeting Mode Session Meeting A Projector A / Room A 102.168.50.101 User A User B Start projecting Get layout

2In the pull-down list, select another projector to use.

Meeting Mode Session Meeting A Projector A / Room A 192.168.50.101 User A User B User A Start projecting Get layout

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to set up the computers to use in projection from all projectors.

■ Switching the Primary/Secondary Monitor

Using the application, you can switch between projection from the primary or secondary monitor.

If your computer has dual monitor support, the computer icons are labeled with numbers. The primary monitor is labeled "1," and the secondary one, "2."

To switch the monitor used for projection, click the icon of computers shown with a number.

Meeting Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A / Room A 192.168.50.101 1 User A User B

■ Temporarily Enlarge Images

During display from multiple computers, you can enlarge projection from one of the computers. To enlarge the display, place the cursor over the computer in the layout area, click 📄 the upper left, and then click [Start projecting]. The image from the selected computer is now projected in full-screen mode.

To cancel the enlarged display, place the cursor over the computer in the layout area again. Click 📄 the upper left, and then click [Start projecting].

Meeting Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A / Room A 192.168.50.101 User A User B

■ Projecting Session Information

You can project session information needed by other users to join a session, such as the session name and projector IP address. To project session information, click

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Projecting Session Information - 1

To cancel display, click again.

Meeting Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A / Room A 192.168.50.101 1 User A User B Start projecting Get layout

■ Fully Blanking Projection

Blanking refers to temporarily stopping projection from computers, so that no image is projected. To blank projection, click 📄 to cancel blanking and return to normal projection, click 📄 again.

Direct Mode Enter IP address to search for projector or select projector from list PJ IP address: 192 . 168 . 50 . 101 Projector A / Room A 192.168.50.101 PW: **** Start projecting Not projecting 1

Direct Mode window

Using Layout Functions

Meeting Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A / Room A 192.168.50.101 1 User A User B Start projecting Get layout

Meeting Mode window

Classroom Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A / Room A 192.168.50.101 Drag and drop the PC icon. User A User B Start projecting Get layout

Classroom Mode window (starting a session)

Broadcast Mode Projecting 1 Stop projecting

Broadcast Mode window

■ Blanking Projection from Your Computer

In Meeting and Classroom Modes, you can blank projection your computer alone.

To blank projection from your computer, click blanking and return to normal projection, click

the computer list. To cancel again.

Meeting Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A / Room A 192.168.50.101 1 User A User B Start projecting Get layout

Meeting Mode window

Classroom Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A / Room A 192.168.50.101 1 User B User B

Classroom Mode window (joining a session)

■ Checking for Computers That Join or Leave Sessions

In Meeting and Classroom Modes, computer users can join or leave sessions as needed. Computers joining a session are added to the computers listed on the layout window.

Meeting Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A/ Room A 192.168.50.101 Drag and drop the PC icon. User A User B Start projecting Get layout

Similarly, computers leaving a session are removed from the list of computers.

Meeting Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A / Room A 192.168.50.101 Drag and drop the PC icon. User A Start projecting Get layout

Completing Application Projection Settings

Application settings can be configured to specify the image quality of computer projection, user nicknames, and other details.

1Click next to the computer icon.

Meeting Mode Session: Meeting A Projector A / Room A 192.168.50.101 Drag and drop the PC icon. User A User B Start projecting Get layout

2The settings window is displayed. Complete each setting as needed, and then click [OK].

Picture qual setting • Use image from this PC. Low Medium High • Optimize speed • Optimize qual Real 1-screen only On Off Projection type Normal Advanced Nickname User A Cancel OK

Available settings are as follows. (Types of settings vary slightly by mode.)

CANON XEED WX520 - 2The settings window is displayed. Complete each setting as needed, and then click [OK]. - 2

When setting windows are displayed while layout windows are minimized to the taskbar, some information may be cut off.

Picture qual setting Select one of the following options, depending on your preferred image quality and frame rate.

High : Projects at a lower frame rate while emphasizing image quality. Select this mode if lower image quality is not acceptable.

Medium : Projection with image quality and frame rate balanced.

Low : Projects at lower image quality to maintain a high frame rate. Select this mode to reduce the network bandwidth used for projection.

Real On : Projection matching the computer display resolution. Available under the following conditions. When projecting from a single computer—or during projection from multiple computers, when projecting an enlarged image from one computer—at a display resolution lower than the projector resolution.

Off : Automatically adjust the projection size to match the projector screen size.

Projection type Normal : Although some windows cannot be projected, the cursor on the computer monitor will not flash.

Advanced : Most windows can be projected, but the cursor on the computer monitor will flash. (Only the cursor on the computer monitor will flash, not the cursor in projected images.)

Nickname Nickname specified when creating or joining sessions. Cannot be changed during sessions. This option is not shown in Direct or Broadcast Modes.

Multicast address The multicast address used in Broadcast Mode can be changed. Use this setting to change the multicast address if it conflicts with that of other network equipment. This option is only shown in Broadcast Mode.

Reducing Windows to a Compact Size

A compact version of windows in all modes is available, showing only the minimum buttons and information needed.

1Click

CANON XEED WX520 - 1Click - 1

Direct Mode Enter IP address to search for projector or select projector from list. PJ IP address: 192 . 168 . 50 . 101 Projector A / Room A 192.168.50.101 PW: **** Start projecting Not projecting

The window is now reduced to a compact size.

Direct Mode 1 Start Not projecting

CANON XEED WX520 - 1Click - 4

The title bar is no longer displayed when the cursor is away from the window, which makes the window even more compact.

1 Start Not projecting

2To revert to original size, click .

CANON XEED WX520 - 2To revert to original size, click . - 1

Direct Mode ? □ — × 1 Start Not projecting

Tips for Better Networked Projection

■ Avoid Exceeding Connection Limits

The maximum number of computers and projectors that can be connected varies by mode. When this limit would be exceeded, it is not possible to add computers or projectors to a session. Thus, if the total number of computer users requesting to join a session at the same time would exceed the limit, their requests may be denied. In this case, an error message is displayed on the computers that could not join the session.

Similarly, if the total number of projectors users attempt to add to a session at the same time would exceed the limit, their requests may be denied. In this case, a message is displayed on computers that could not add projectors, indicating that the projector list has been updated.

■ Operation if Devices Are Disconnected

If the connection is lost (for example, if a LAN cable is accidentally disconnected), the affected computer or projector leaves the session. Disconnection of essential computers or projectors will terminate a session.

For example, in Classroom Mode, disconnection of the presenter's computer will terminate the session.

■ If Projectors Cannot Be Detected

If projectors cannot be detected or no image is displayed (except for the cursor) when you are attempting to connect to projectors in other subnets in Broadcast Mode, make sure the router supports multicast routing. Routers that do not support IPv4 multicast routing cannot be used to connect to projectors in other subnets in Broadcast Mode. Note that the router must be set up to route multicast addresses used by the application.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ If Projectors Cannot Be Detected - 1

In Broadcast Mode, the following message is displayed if no signal is received from computers for 30 seconds. The projector IP address and name are shown in the upper left.

Broadcast Mode 192.168.50.101 / Projector A Network Error Image is unreachable. Check router settings.

Restrictions

■ Router Connections

Although the application can also link computers and projectors over a network via a router, operation is only ensured over one router hop. Note that before projecting from projectors in other subnets in Broadcast Mode, you must configure the router's multicast routing settings. For details, ask your network administrator.

■ Security Dialog Box Projection

The application cannot be used to project the Windows Security dialog box, normally accessed by pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del.

■ Screen Capture Software

It may not be possible to start the application while software that restricts screen captures is running.

■ Animated Cursors

Animation of animated cursors is not projected.

■ Alternative Cursors

Cursors used by some software may not be projected correctly. In this case, an arrow pointer is projected.

■ Projection Restrictions

Some windows and icons displayed on computers cannot be projected. Although switching the projection type to advanced will enable projection of more elements, not all elements can be projected even in this case.

Projected images may not always match the computer screens.

■ Network Bandwidth

Some network conditions may cause a delay in projection.

■ Projection through Firewalls

Some application functions may not be available in environments where Windows Firewall or other software restricting network communication are installed.

■ Application Display

Application display may be distorted if you have adjusted the screen resolution in Windows.

MULTIMEDIA PROJECTOR

WUX450

WX520

WUX400ST

WX450ST

Appendix

CANON XEED WX520 - Appendix - 1

natural_image Two white and black cameras with visible lens and control buttons, shown from different angles (no text or symbols on the devices themselves)

Appendix

Table of Contents

Safety Instructions

Before Use

Operation

Projecting an Image

Useful Functions Available During a Presentation

Setting Functions from Menus

Installation and Maintenance

Installation

Connecting to a Network

Maintenance

Networked Multi-Projection

Networked Multi-Projection Overview

Operation in Each Mode

Functions in All Modes

Appendix

Other Information

Index

LED Indicator Meanings

When there is a problem with the projector, the LED indicator on the side of the projector illuminates or flashes continuously after the projector is turned off.

- Wait until the cooling fan stops and disconnect the power plug from the electrical outlet before dealing with the problem.

LED indicator statusMeaning Countermeasure
WARNING and TEMP are lit.Temperature abnormalityThe temperature inside the projector is too high for some reason or the outside air temperature is higher than the operating range. If the problem is inside the projector, check whether the projector is installed and operating normally, unplug the projector from the power outlet to cool down the projector interior and then restart projection. If the air intake or exhaust vent is blocked, remove the obstacle. If the same warning occurs again, there may be a malfunction in the projector. Contact the Canon Customer Support Center.
WARNING and LAMP are lit.Faulty lamp The lamp does not illuminate. Turn the power off and then back on and check whether or not the lamp illuminates. Also, check whether the air intake or exhaust vent is blocked, and whether the air filter is clogged with dust. The warning may indicate if the air flow in and out of the projector is blocked, or if the internal temperature of the projector rises. If the air filter is clogged, clean or replace the air filter. (P199, P200) If the lamp does not illuminate, replace it. If the same warning occurs again, there may be a malfunction in the lamp drive circuit. Contact the Canon Customer Support Center.
WARNING flashes 3 times, LAMP is lit.Faulty lamp coverThe lamp cover is open. Unplug the projector from the power outlet, then install the lamp cover correctly and turn on the projector again. If the lamp cover has been installed properly, there may be a malfunction in the lamp cover detection switch. Contact the Canon Customer Support Center.
WARNING (only) flashes 4 times repeatedly.Faulty cooling fanThere may be a malfunction in the cooling fan or another component. Unplug the projector from the electrical outlet, then plug it back into the outlet and turn on the projector again. Contact the Canon Customer Support Center if the same warning occurs again.
WARNING (only) flashes 5 times repeatedly.Faulty power supplyAbnormal voltage is applied to some parts in the power supply or another failure may have occurred. Unplug the projector from the electrical outlet, then plug it back into the outlet and turn on the projector again. Contact the Canon Customer Support Center if the same warning occurs again.
WARNING (only) flashes 3 times repeatedly.Filter error The air filter is not installed. Check whether or not the air filter is installed correctly. Contact the Canon Customer Support Center if the same warning occurs again.

Symptoms and Solutions

■ You Cannot Turn on the Projector

Cause Countermeasure
The power cord is not connected correctly.Check whether the power cord is connected correctly. (P143)
The power cord has just been connected.Wait at least one second after plugging the projector in until you press the POWER button. You cannot turn the projector on immediately after plugging it in. (P52)
The lamp cover is open.Unplug the projector from the power outlet, then install the lamp cover correctly and turn on the projector again.
The safety device is activated because the air intake or the exhaust vent is blocked and the internal temperature of the projector has increased.When the safety device is active, the [POWER ON] indicator does not turn on when you connect the power cord. You cannot disable this safety device. Remove any obstacle that is blocking the air intake or exhaust vent and contact the Canon Customer Support Center.
The air filter is not installed correctly.Check whether the air filter is installed correctly. (P199)
Key lock is enabled.Check that Key lock (P112) is not enabled for the projector or the remote control.

■ You Cannot Project an Image from the Projector

Cause Countermeasure
A cable is not connected correctly.Check whether the projector is connected to the computer or AV equipment correctly. (P137, P140)
20 seconds have not elapsed since the projector was turned on.When the projector is turned on, the opening window is displayed for approximately 20 seconds. To project an image immediately, press the OK button on the remote control or side control. (P52)
No image is sent from the AV equipment.Check whether an image is played on the connected video camcorder, DVD, etc.
Connection with the input terminal has not been performed correctly.Check whether the AV equipment is connected to the projector input terminal correctly. (P136)
No input signal type has been selected for the connected AV equipment.Check that the same input signal has been correctly selected for the connected AV equipment from the [INPUT] menu. (P54)
The input signal type is incorrect.Check whether the selected input signal type is correct. (P88, P292)
The BLANK function has been selected.Press the BLANK button on the remote control. (P76)
No image is projected due to a problem with the computer.Turn first the projector and then the computer off and then back on again.
The external monitor output is not set on the notebook computer correctly.Turn on the external monitor output on the notebook computer. To turn on the external monitor output, press the [LCD] or [VGA] function key or a key with an icon for the external monitor, while holding down the [Fn] key on the keyboard of the notebook computer. With Windows 7, you can turn on image output by holding down the Windows logo key and pressing the [P] key. (P145)The combination of keys used to perform this operation varies depending on the model of notebook computer. For more detailed information, refer to the manual that came with your computer.
The displayed image is not the same as that displayed on the computer.Check whether the dual screen (multi-display) mode is selected on the computer. If dual screen mode is selected, change the computer display output to mirroring mode.The output setting method varies among computer manufacturers. For more detailed information, refer to the manual that came with your computer.
Images on a USB flash drive cannot be projected.Projection from USB flash drives requires JPEG images with a resolution not exceeding 7000x7000, single-byte alphanumeric file names, and a FAT-formatted drive.
Split-screen display is not available.Split-screen display is not available when projecting images from USB flash drives or over a network.
The LAN cable (shielded twisted pair) is not connected correctly.Check whether the LAN cable (shielded twisted pair) is connected to the projector correctly. (P168)
A network connection cannot be established.Network connections are not available until about 40 seconds after startup. (P181)

■ There is no Sound

Cause Countermeasure
The audio cable is not connected correctly.Check the audio cable connection. (P136)
The MUTE function is enabled.Press the MUTE button on the remote control. (P77)
The volume level is adjusted to the minimum.Press the VOL button on the remote control or the VOL+ button on the side control to adjust the volume level. (P77)
An audio cable with a built-in resistor is used.Use an audio cable without a built-in resistor.
Audio in terminal select is [Off].Change the Audio In terminal to the appropriate setting. (P153)

■ The Projected Image Is Blurred

Cause Countermeasure
The image is out of focus.Adjust the focus. (P59)
The distance to the screen is too short.Check whether the distance to the screen is appropriate.
The projector is not placed straight in front of the screen.Check whether the projector is placed obliquely to the screen. A slight error in the projection angle can be corrected through the keystone adjustment function. (P68)
The projector has been moved to a place where the temperature varies a lot.When the projector is moved from a location where the temperature is low to a location where the temperature is high, condensation may form on the lens. The condensation will evaporate after a period of time and the projector will be able to project a normal image.
The lens is stained. Cleanthe lens. (P198)
The tracking is bad. Adjustthe tracking with the [Auto PC] or [Tracking] function. (P57, P89)
Video is blurred. Activatemotion blur reduction. (P114)
Motion blur reduction is not available.Motion blur reduction is not available when projecting JPEG files from USB flash drives or over a network, or for networked multi-projection. Similarly, motion blur reduction is not available in image modes other than [Presentation] or [Dynamic].
The sharpness setting is not available.Sharpness cannot be adjusted during split-screen display.

■ You Cannot Project an Image Appropriately

Cause Countermeasure
The projected image is inverted in the vertical or horizontal direction.The ceiling mounted / rear projection setting is incorrect. Check the [Image flip H/V] setting in the [Install settings] menu. (P146)
The dot clock of the input signal is higher than 162 MHz with a BNC cable.Set the signal dot clock to 162 MHz or less on your computer.
A computer cable is used in which some pins are not connected.Use a computer cable in which all pins are connected.

■ The Projector Power Turns Off

Cause Countermeasure
The air intake or exhaust vent is blocked.Check whether the air intake or exhaust vent is blocked. If the air intake or exhaust vent is blocked, the temperature inside the projector will increase and the power is automatically turned off to protect the projector. (The [WARNING] indicator and [TEMP] indicator are lit.) Wait until the projector temperature drops, then make sure that the intake and exhaust vents are not blocked and turn on the projector. (P37, P52)
The air filter is dirty. Checkwhether the air filter is clogged with dust.If the air filter is clogged, clean or replace the air filter. (P199)
The lamp has ruptured (or there is a lamp malfunction).If the lamp has ruptured, follow the instructions in “Precautions when replacing lamps that stop working” (P26).
The operating temperature is inappropriate.Check whether the operating temperature is between 0°C (32°F) and 40°C (104°F). (P29)Projector settings must be adjusted when using the projector at altitudes of 2,300 m (7,545.8') or higher. Set [Fan mode] in the [Install settings] menu to [High altitude] (P152).

■ You Cannot Operate the Remote Control

Cause Countermeasure
Batteries are not installed properly or they have run out.Check whether batteries are installed correctly. If batteries are installed correctly, replace them with new batteries. (P34)
You are operating the remote control from the outside of the remote control operating range.Check whether you are operating the remote control within the remote control operating range of the main unit of the projector. (P35)
There is an obstacle between the projector and the remote control.Remove the obstacle between the infrared remote receiver of the main unit of the projector and the remote control or point the remote control in an obstacle-free path.
You are operating the remote control in an unsuitable operating environment.Check whether the infrared remote receiver of the main unit of the projector is exposed to direct sunlight or strong light of lighting apparatus. (P35)
The channel setting of the remote control does not match the setting of the projector.Check whether the channel setting of the remote control has been changed. You can check the [Remote control channel] setting in the [System settings] menu. (P113)
The key lock function is preventing operation of the remote control.Check whether [Key lock] is enabled to disable the remote control operation.In the [System settings] menu, set [Key lock] to [Off]. (P112)

■ You Cannot Control Networked Multi-Projection

Cause Countermeasure
The application cannot be installed.Confirm that the monitor resolution is at least 1024x768.Check the system requirements (P210).

If the above causes cannot be identified, the projector may be damaged.

Contact the Canon Customer Support Center as soon as possible.

CANON XEED WX520 - ■ You Cannot Control Networked Multi-Projection - 1

Administrator privileges are required when installing NMPJ from the universal installer.

The following message is displayed when you are logged in as a regular user:

“Installation program of Network Multi Projection requires administrator privileges.”

Relationship between Aspect and Screen Aspect

This section describes the relationship between screen aspect (P60) and aspect (P66).

Select an optimum aspect ratio of the projected image (screen aspect) or an optimum screen mode (aspect) according to the aspect ratio of the screen, type of input image signal and so on for the projection to make best use of the screen size.

  • If a computer image with an aspect ratio of 16:9 is not projected correctly when the setting is [Auto], select [16:9] as the screen aspect.
  • For a 16:9 image with black borders at the top and bottom, such as a terrestrial broadcast movie, you can project the 16:9 image area so that it is projected on the entire screen by selecting [Zoom] in [Aspect].

CANON XEED WX520 - Relationship between Aspect and Screen Aspect - 1

natural_image Diagram showing a mountain silhouette transforming into a simplified mountain silhouette (no text or symbols)

There may be some cases that [Zoom] cannot be selected depending on the input signal and/or resolution.

- For keystone correction (P68), select an option other than [4:3 D. image shift] or [16:9 D. image shift] for [Screen aspect].

■ When the image is projected on a 16:10 screen

Aspect ratio of connected deviceScreen aspect setting (P60)Aspect setting (P66)Screen image
(16:10)1920 x 12001440 x 9001280 x 800[16:10][16:10][Auto]CANON XEED WX520 - Relationship between Aspect and Screen Aspect - 2
(16:9)1920 x 10801280 x 720[16:10]CANON XEED WX520 - Relationship between Aspect and Screen Aspect - 3
(4:3)1600 x 12001400 x 1050640 x 480[16:10]CANON XEED WX520 - Relationship between Aspect and Screen Aspect - 4

■ When the image is projected on a 16:9 screen

Aspect ratio of connected deviceScreen aspect setting (P60)Aspect setting (P66)Screen image
(16:10)1920 x 12001440 x 9001280 x 800[16:9][16:9D. image shift][16:9]CANON XEED WX520 - ■ When the image is projected on a 16:9 screen - 1
(16:9)1920 x 10801280 x 720[16:9][Auto]CANON XEED WX520 - ■ When the image is projected on a 16:9 screen - 2
(4:3)1600 x 12001400 x 1050640 x 480[16:9]CANON XEED WX520 - ■ When the image is projected on a 16:9 screen - 3

■ When the image is projected on a 4:3 screen

Aspect ratio of connected deviceScreen aspect setting (P60)Aspect setting (P66)Screen image
(16:10)1920 x 12001440 x 9001280 x 800[4:3][4:3D. image shift][4:3]CANON XEED WX520 - ■ When the image is projected on a 4:3 screen - 1
(16:9)1920 x 10801280 x 720[4:3]CANON XEED WX520 - ■ When the image is projected on a 4:3 screen - 2
(4:3)1600 x 12001400 x 1050640 x 480[4:3][Auto]CANON XEED WX520 - ■ When the image is projected on a 4:3 screen - 3

■ When projecting on a 16:10 screen in the aspect ratio of the connected device

Aspect ratio of connected deviceScreen aspect setting (P60)Aspect setting (P66)Screen image
(16:10)1920 x 12001440 x 9001280 x 800[16:10][16:10][Auto]CANON XEED WX520 - ■ When projecting on a 16:10 screen in the aspect ratio of the connected device - 1
(16:9)1920 x 10801280 x 720[16:9][Auto]CANON XEED WX520 - ■ When projecting on a 16:10 screen in the aspect ratio of the connected device - 2
(4:3)1600 x 12001400 x 1050640 x 480[4:3][Auto]CANON XEED WX520 - ■ When projecting on a 16:10 screen in the aspect ratio of the connected device - 3

■ When projecting on a 16:9 screen in the aspect ratio of the connected device

Aspect ratio of connected deviceScreen aspect setting (P60)Aspect setting (P66)Screen image
(16:10)1920 x 12001440 x 9001280 x 800[16:9][16:9D. image shift][Auto]CANON XEED WX520 - ■ When projecting on a 16:9 screen in the aspect ratio of the connected device - 1
(16:9)1920 x 10801280 x 720[16:9][Auto]CANON XEED WX520 - ■ When projecting on a 16:9 screen in the aspect ratio of the connected device - 2
(4:3)1600 x 12001400 x 1050640 x 480[4:3][Auto]CANON XEED WX520 - ■ When projecting on a 16:9 screen in the aspect ratio of the connected device - 3

■ When projecting on a 4:3 screen in the aspect ratio of the connected device

Aspect ratio of connected deviceScreen aspect setting (P60)Aspect setting (P66)Screen image
(16:10)1920 x 12001440 x 9001280 x 800[4:3][4:3D. image shift][Auto]CANON XEED WX520 - ■ When projecting on a 16:9 screen in the aspect ratio of the connected device - 4
(16:9)1920 x 10801280 x 720[16:9][Auto]CANON XEED WX520 - ■ When projecting on a 16:9 screen in the aspect ratio of the connected device - 5
(4:3)1600 x 12001400 x 1050640 x 480[4:3][Auto]CANON XEED WX520 - ■ When projecting on a 16:9 screen in the aspect ratio of the connected device - 6

Displayed Test Patterns

The test pattern can be displayed by pressing the TEST PATTERN button. Use this when there is no image signal, etc.

While the test pattern is displayed, you can use the [▲/ [ ]▼buttons to change to a different test pattern. Also, if there is an option pattern available, you can use the [◀/ [ ]▼buttons to switch pattern. A dialog box is shown during test pattern display that identifies the current test pattern and provides operating instructions.

The following test patterns can be displayed.

CANON XEED WX520 - Displayed Test Patterns - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Color bar(1)"] --> B["(2)"]
    B --> C["Stairstep H"]
    B --> D["(3)"]
    D --> E["Stairstep V"]
    E --> F["(4)"]
    F --> G["(5)"]
    G --> H["(6)"]
    H --> I["Stairstep color"]
    I --> J["(7)"]
    J --> K["Checker"]
    J --> L["(8)"]
    L --> M["Multi"]
    M --> N["(9)"]
    N --> O["Character"]
    O --> P["(10)"]
    P --> Q["Focus"]
    Q --> R["(11)"]
    R --> S["Border"]
    S --> T["(12)"]
    T --> U["Cross Hatch"]

Supported Signal Types

This projector supports the following signal types.

If your computer or AV equipment is compatible with any one of these signal types, the projector's Auto PC function selects the input signal type to project an image appropriately.

Analog PC

Resolution (dots)Signal typeHorizontal frequency (kHz)Vertical frequency (Hz)
640 x 480 VGA 31.469 59.940
720 x 480 - 31.469 59.940
720 x 576 - 31.250 50.000
800 x 600 SVGA 37.879 60.317
848 x 480 - 31.020 60.000
1024 x 768 XGA 48.363 60.004
1280 x 720 - 45.000*160.000*1
1280 x 768WXGA47.776 59.870
47.396 59.995
1280 x 80049.702 59.810
49.306 59.910
1280 x 960 - 60.000 60.000
1280 x 1024 SXGA 63.981 60.020
1366 x 768 - 47.712 59.790
1400 x 1050 SXGA+64.744 59.948
65.317 59.978
1440 x 900WXGA+55.935 59.887
55.469 59.901
1600 x 900 - 60.000 60.000
1600 x 1200 UXGA75.000 60.000
1680 x 1050WSXGA+64.674 59.883
65.290 59.954
1920 x 1080-56.250 50.000
67.500 60.000
1920 x 1200WUXGA74.038*259.950*2

Digital PC

Resolution (dots)Signal typeHorizontal frequency (kHz)Vertical frequency (Hz)
640 x 480D-VGA31.469 59.940
720 x 480 - 31.469 59.940
720 x 576 - 31.250 50.000
800 x 600 D-SVGA37.879 60.317
1024 x 768D-XGA48.363 60.004
1280 x 720 -37.500 50.000
45.000 60.000
1280 x 800D-WXGA49.702 59.810
49.306 59.910
1280 x 1024D-SXGA63.981 60.020
1366 x 768 - 47.712 59.790
1400 x 1050D-SXGA+64.744 59.948
65.317 59.978
1440 x 900D-WXGA+55.935 59.887
55.469 59.901
1600 x 900 - 60.000 60.000
1600 x 1200D-UXGA75.000 60.000
1680 x 1050D-WSXGA+64.674 59.883
65.290 59.954
1920 x 1080-27.000 24.000
56.250 50.000
67.500 60.000
Resolution (dots) Signal typeHorizontal frequency (kHz)Vertical frequency (Hz)
1080PsF(1920 x 1080i)-27.000 24.000
28.125 25.000
33.750 30.000
1920 x 1200 D-WUXGA 74.038* ^2 59.950*2

HDMI

Connecting to a computer

Resolution (dots) Signal typeHorizontal frequency (kHz)Vertical frequency (Hz)
640 x 480 VGA 31.469 59.940
800 x 600 SVGA 37.879 60.317
1024 x 768 XGA 48.363 60.004
1280 x 800 WXGA49.702 59.810
49.306 59.910
1280 x 1024SXGA63.981 60.020
1366 x 768-47.712 59.790
1400 x 1050SXGA+64.744 59.948
65.317 59.978
1440 x 900WXGA+55.935 59.887
55.469 59.901
1600 x 900-60.000 60.000
1600 x 1200UXGA75.000 60.000
1680 x 1050WSXGA+64.674 59.883
65.290 59.954
1920 x 1200WUXGA 74.038^*2 59.950^*2

Connecting with AV equipment

Signal typeHorizontal frequency (kHz)Vertical frequency (Hz)
480p31.46959.940
576p31.25050.000
720p37.50050.000
45.00060.000
1080i28.12550.000
33.75060.000
1080p27.00024.000
56.25050.000
67.50060.000

Component

Signal typeHorizontal frequency (kHz)Vertical frequency (Hz)
480i15.73459.940
480p31.46959.940
576i15.62550.000
576p31.25050.000
720p37.50050.000
45.00060.000
1080i28.12550.000
33.75060.000
1080p56.25050.000
67.50060.000
1080PsF27.00024.000
28.12525.000
33.75030.000

*1: WX520/WX450ST, *2: WUX450/WUX400ST

* The specifications in the table above are subject to change without notice.

* This projector does not support any computer output signal with a dot clock of higher than 162 MHz.

* Use a computer cable in which all pins are connected. If the cable is a type in which all pins are not connected, the image may not be correctly displayed.

■ Projector

WUX450/WX520

Model name WUX450WX520
Display system RGB liquid crystal system
Optical systemColor separation by dichroic mirror / polarizing beam splitter and color composition by prism
Display deviceType Reflective liquid crystal panel
Size / Aspect ratio 0.71" x 3/ 16:10 0.70" x 3 / 16:10
Drive system Active matrix system
Number dots / Total number dots2,304,000 (1920 x 1200) x 3 panels / 6,912,0001,296,000 (1440 x 900) x 3 panels / 3,888,000
Projection lensZoom ratio / Focal length / F value1.8x / 21.7 - 39.0 mm / f2.8
Zooming / Focusing systemManual / Manual
Lens shiftV: 0% to +60% (manual)H: ±10% (manual)V: 0% to +62% (manual)H: ±10% (manual)
Light source 250-NSHA 260 W
Image size (projection distance)40" to 300"(1.2 m to 16.2 m / 3.9' to 53.1')40" to 300"(1.2 m to 16.6 m / 3.9' to 54.5')
Number of colors 16,770,000 colors (full color)
Brightness*2 (in presentation mode)4500 lumen 5200 lumen
Contrast ratio*22000:1 (Fully white:fully black, presentation mode, Iris [On])
Ratio of brightness at periphery to center*290%
Speaker 5W monaural x 1
Maximum input resolution 1920x 1200 dots 1920 x 1080 dots
Video signalsAnalog PC inputWUXGA*1, WSXGA+, UXGA, WXGA+, SXGA+, SXGA, WXGA, XGA, SVGA, VGA
Digital PC inputD-WUXGA*1, D-WSXGA+, D-UXGA, D-WXGA+, D-SXGA+, D-SXGA, D-WXGA, D-XGA, D-SVGA, D-VGA
HDMI inputFrom connected computers:WUXGA*1, WSXGA+, UXGA, WXGA+, SXGA+, SXGA, WXGA, XGA, SVGA, VGAFrom connected AV equipment:1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p, 480p
Component video input1080PsF, 1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p, 576i, 480p, 480i
Input terminalDVI-I terminalAnalog PC, Digital PC (29-pin DVI connector)
HDMI terminalDigital PC, digital video input (deep color only)
ANALOG PC / COMPONENT terminalAnalog PC, Component (mini D-sub 15-pin)
LAN terminal Networked multi-projection (RJ-45)
USB PortJPEG images (USB Mass Storage Class)
CONTROL terminalRS-232C (D-sub 9-pin)
REMOTE terminalWired remote control (3.5ø stereo mini jack)
AUDIO IN terminalAudio signal (3.5ø stereo mini jack x 2)
AUDIO OUT terminalAudio signal (3.5ø stereo mini jack)
Model nameWUX450WX520
Input signalDigital PC TMDS (TransitionMinimized Differential Signaling)
Analog PC0.7Vp-p, positive polarity, impedance = 75ΩHorizontal / vertical synchronization: TTL level, negative or positive polarity
Component videoCOMPONENT: Separate Y Cb/Pb Cr/Pr signalY: 1Vp-p, negative synchronization, impedance = 75ΩCb/Pb: 0.7Vp-p, impedance = 75ΩCr/Pr: 0.7Vp-p, impedance = 75Ω
Audio Impedance = 47kΩ or more
Noise 38 / 32dB (Lamp mode: Full power/Power saver)
Operating temperature 0°C (32°F) - 40°C (104°F)
Power supply AC100V - 240V 50 / 60Hz
Power consumption (Full power / power saver / low-power standby with LAN on / standby with LAN off)365W / 295W / 0.6W / 0.2W 35W / 285W / 0.6W / 0.2W
Dimensions337 mm (W) x 134 mm (H) x 370 mm (D) / 13.3 (W) x 5.3 (H) x 14.6 (D) in (including the projection)
Mass 5.9 kg / 13.0 lbs
AccessoriesRemote control, remote control dry-cell batteries, power cord, PC cable, lens cap, User's Manual (this manual), Important Information and Warranty Card

*1 WUX450 only
*2 Compliance with ISO21118-2012

WUX400ST/WX450ST

Model name WUX400ST WX450ST
Display system RGB liquid crystal system
Optical systemColor separation by dichroic mirror / polarizing beam splitter and color composition by prism
Display deviceType Reflective liquid crystal panel
Size / Aspect ratio0.71" x 3 / 16:100.70" x 3 / 16:10
Drive systemActive matrix system
Number dots / Total number dots2,304,000 (1920 x 1200) x 3 panels / 6,912,0001,296,000 (1440 x 900) x 3 panels / 3,888,000
Projection lensFocal length / F value8.8 mm / f2.7
Focusing systemManual
Lens shiftV: 0% to +75% (manual)H: ±10% (manual)V: 0% to +77% (manual)H: ±10% (manual)
Light source250-NSHA 260 W
Image size (projection distance)50" to 200"(0.60 m to 2.42 m / 2.0' to 7.4')50" to 200"(0.61 m to 2.48 m / 2.0' to 8.1')
Number of colors16,770,000 colors (full color)
Brightness*2 (in presentation mode)4000 lumen 4500 lumen
Contrast ratio*22000:1 (Fully white:fully black, presentation mode, Iris [On])
Model nameWUX400STWX450ST
Ratio of brightness at periphery to center*280%
Speaker 5W monaural x 1
Maximum input resolution 1920x 1200 dots 1920 x 1080 dots
Video signalsAnalog PC inputWUXGA*1, WSXGA+, UXGA, WXGA+, SXGA+, SXGA, WXGA, XGA, SVGA, VGA
Digital PC inputD-WUXGA*1, D-WSXGA+, D-UXGA, D-WXGA+, D-SXGA+, D-SXGA, D-WXGA, D-XGA, D-SVGA, D-VGA
HDMI inputFrom connected computers: WUXGA*1, WSXGA+, UXGA, WXGA+, SXGA+, SXGA, WXGA, XGA, SVGA, VGAFrom connected AV equipment: 1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p, 480p
Component video input 10800PsF, 1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p, 576i, 480p, 480i
Input terminalDVI-I terminal Analog PC, Digital PC (29-pin DVI connector)
HDMI terminal Digital PC, digital video input (deep color only)
ANALOG PC / COMPONENT terminalAnalog PC, Component (mini D-sub 15-pin)
LAN terminal Networked multi-projection (RJ-45)
USB Port JPEG images (USB Mass Storage Class)
CONTROL terminal RS-232C (D-sub 9-pin)
REMOTE terminal Wired remote control (3.5ø stereo mini jack)
AUDIO IN terminal Audio signal (3.5ø stereo mini jack x 2)
AUDIO OUT terminal Audio signal (3.5ø stereo mini jack)
Input signalDigital PCTMDS (Transition Minimized Differential Signaling)
Analog PC0.7Vp-p, positive polarity, impedance = 75ΩHorizontal / vertical synchronization: TTL level, negative or positive polarity
Component videoCOMPONENT: Separate Y Cb/Pb Cr/Pr signalY: 1Vp-p, negative synchronization, impedance = 75ΩCb/Pb: 0.7Vp-p, impedance = 75ΩCr/Pr: 0.7Vp-p, impedance = 75Ω
AudioImpedance = 47kΩ or more
Noise38 / 32dB (Lamp mode: Full power/Power saver)
Operating temperature 0°C (32°F) - 40°C (104°F)
Power supplyAC100V - 240V 50 / 60Hz
Power consumption (Full power / power saver / low-power standby with LAN on / standby with LAN off)365W / 295W / 0.6W / 0.2W355W / 285W / 0.6W / 0.2W
Dimensions337 mm (W) x 134 mm (H) x 415 mm (D) / 13.3 (W) x 5.3 (H) x 16.3 (D) in (including the projection)
Mass6.3 kg / 13.9 lbs
AccessoriesRemote control, remote control dry-cell batteries, power cord, lens cap, PC cable, User's Manual (this manual), Important Information and Warranty Card

*1 WUX400ST only
*2 Compliance with ISO21118-2012

* 99.99% or more of the LCD panel pixels are effective. During projection, 0.01% or less of pixels may stay lit or unlit due to the characteristics of the LCD panel.
* Using the projector continuously for an extended period of time may accelerate the deterioration of optical parts.

■ Remote control

Model number RS-RC06
Power supply DC 3.0V, using two AAA-size batteries
Operating range Approx. 8 m ±25° horizontal and vertical (to infrared remote receiver)
Dimensions43 mm (W) x 23 mm (H) x 135 mm (D) /1.7 (W) x 0.9 (H) x 5.3 (D) in
Weight 56 g / 2.0 oz

■ External View

WUX450/WX520
K520 91.5 mm (3.6") 72 mm (2.8") 362 mm (14.3") 134 mm (5.3") 337 mm (13.3") 118 mm (4.6") 370 mm (14.6)

Bolt holes (M6 x 4) for installation of ceiling attachment

33 mm (1.3") 301 mm (11.9") 144.5 mm (5.7") 289 mm (11.3") 144.5 mm (5.7)

WUX400ST/WX450ST

91.5 mm (3.6") 72 mm (2.8") 134 mm (5.3") 337 mm (13.3)

0000 362 mm (14.3")

415 mm (16.3") 118 mm (4.6")

Bolt holes (M6 x 4) for installation of ceiling attachment

33 mm (1.3") 301 mm (11.9") 144.5 mm (5.7") 289 mm (11.3") 144.5 mm (5.7)

■ ANALOG PC-2 / COMPONENT terminal

This terminal is used as a computer ANALOG PC input or COMPONENT input terminal. Use a D-sub computer cable.

The terminal specifications for the ANALOG PC input and COMPONENT input are the same.

Mini D-sub 15-pin
CANON XEED WX520 - ■ ANALOG PC-2 / COMPONENT terminal - 1

natural_image Diagram of a 16-pin D-sub connector (no text or symbols)
Pin No.Signal Pin No.Signal
1 R 9+5 V power
2G 1 0Ground(Vertical sync.)
3 B11 Ground
4O P EN1 2
5Ground(Horizontal sync.)13Horizontal sync.
6 Ground (R)14 Vertical sync.
7 Ground (G)15 DDC clock
8 Ground (B)

■ Service Port (CONTROL)

Pin assignment
CANON XEED WX520 - ■ Service Port (CONTROL) - 1

natural_image Diagram of a 16-pin D-sub connector (no text or symbols)
Pin No.Signal
1OPEN
2RxD
3TxD
4OPEN
5GND
6OPEN
7 Internal pull-up
8OPEN
9OPEN

Communication format

Communication mode : RS-232-C, asynchronous, half-duplex communication

Communication speed : 19200bps

Character length : 8 bits

Stop bits : 2 bits

Parity : None

Flow control : None

Control commands

Commands ASCII representation Binary representation
Power supplyPower on POWER=ON50h 4Fh 57h 45h 52h 3Dh 4Fh 4Eh 0Dh
Power off POWER=OFF50h 4Fh 57h 45h 52h 3Dh 4Fh 46h 46h 0Dh
Power status acquisitionGET=POWER47h 45h 54h 3Dh 50h 4Fh 57h 45h 52h 0Dh
Input sourceHDMI INPUT=HDMI49h 4Eh 50h 55h 54h 3Dh 48h 44h 4Dh 49h 0Dh
Digital PC INPUT=D-RGB49h 4Eh 50h 55h 54h 3Dh 44h 2Dh 52h 47h 42h 0Dh
Analog PC-1 INPUT=A-RGB149h 4Eh 50h 55h 54h 3Dh 41h 2Dh 52h 47h 42h 31h 0Dh
Analog PC-2 INPUT=A-RGB249h 4Eh 50h 55h 54h 3Dh 41h 2Dh 52h 47h 42h 32h 0Dh
Component INPUT=COMP49h 4Eh 50h 55h 54h 3Dh 43h 4Fh 4Dh 50h 0Dh
LAN INPUT=LAN49h 4Eh 50h 55h 54h 3Dh 4Ch 41h 4Eh 0Dh
USB INPUT=USB49h 4Eh 50h 55h 54h 3Dh 55h 53h 42h 0Dh
Input source acquisitionGET=INPUT47h 45h 54h 3Dh 49h 4Eh 50h 55h 54h 0Dh
Image modeStandard IMAGE=STANDARD49h 4Dh 41h 47h 45h 3Dh 53h 54h 41h 4Eh 44h 41h 52h 44h 0Dh
Presentation IMAGE=PRESENTATION49h 4Dh 41h 47h 45h 3Dh 50h 52h 45h 53h 45h 4Eh 54h 41h 54h 49h 4Fh 4Eh 0Dh
Photo/sRGB IMAGE=PHOTO_SRGB49h 4Dh 41h 47h 45h 3Dh 50h 48h 4Fh 54h 4Fh 5Fh 53h 52h 47h 42h 0Dh
Dynamic IMAGE=DYNAMIC49h 4Dh 41h 47h 45h 3Dh 44h 59h 4Eh 41h 4Dh 49h 43h 0Dh
Video IMAGE=VIDEO49h 4Dh 41h 47h 45h 3Dh 56h 49h 44h 45h 4Fh 0Dh
Image modeUser 1IMAGE=USER_149h 4Dh 41h 47h 45h 3Dh 55h 53h 45h 52h 5Fh 31h 0Dh
User 2IMAGE=USER_249h 4Dh 41h 47h 45h 3Dh 55h 53h 45h 52h 5Fh 32h 0Dh
User 3IMAGE=USER_349h 4Dh 41h 47h 45h 3Dh 55h 53h 45h 52h 5Fh 33h 0Dh
User 4IMAGE=USER_449h 4Dh 41h 47h 45h 3Dh 55h 53h 45h 52h 5Fh 34h 0Dh
User 5IMAGE=USER_549h 4Dh 41h 47h 45h 3Dh 55h 53h 45h 52h 5Fh 35h 0Dh
Image mode acquisitionGET=IMAGE47h 45h 54h 3Dh 49h 4Dh 41h 47h 45h 0Dh
BrightnessBrightness value settingBRI=0Dh42h 52h 49h 3Dh
Brightness acquisitionGET=BRI47h 45h 54h 3Dh 42h 52h 49h 0Dh
Sharpness adjustment functionSharpness value settingSHARP=0Dh53h 48h 41h 52h 50h 3Dh
Sharpness acquisitionGET=SHARP47h 45h 54h 3Dh 53h 48h 41h 52h 50h 0Dh
ContrastContrast value settingCONT=43h 4Fh 4Eh 54h 3Dh
Contrast acquisitionGET=CONT47h 45h 54h 3Dh 43h 4Fh 4Eh 54h 0Dh
AspectAuto ASPECT=AUTO41h 53h 50h 45h 43h 54h 3Dh 41h 55h 54h 4Fh 0Dh
4:3 ASPECT=4:3341h 53h 50h 45h 43h 54h 3Dh 34h 3Ah 33h 0Dh
16:9 ASPECT=16:941h 53h 50h 45h 43h 54h 3Dh 31h 36h 3Ah 39h 0Dh
16:10 ASPECT=16:1041h 53h 50h 45h 43h 54h 3Dh 31h 36h 3Ah 31h 30h 0Dh
Zoom ASPECT=ZOOM41h 53h 50h 45h 43h 54h 3Dh 5Ah 4Fh 4Fh 4Dh 0Dh
True size ASPECT=TRUE41h 53h 50h 45h 43h 54h 3Dh 54h 52h 55h 45h 0Dh
Aspect value acquisitionGET=ASPECT47h 45h 54h 3Dh 41h 53h 50h 45h 43h 54h 0Dh
Lamp modeFull power LAMP=FULL4Ch 41h 4Dh 50h 3Dh 46h 55h 4Ch 4Ch 0Dh
Power saver LAMP=ECO4Ch 41h 4Dh 50h 3Dh 45h 43h 4Fh 0Dh
Lamp mode value acquisitionGET=LAMP47h 45h 54h 3Dh 4Ch 41h 4Dh 50h 0Dh
BlankBlank On BLANK=ON42h 4Ch 41h 4Eh 4Bh 3Dh 4Fh 4Eh 0Dh
Blank Off BLANK=OFF42h 4Ch 41h 4Eh 4Bh 3Dh 4Fh 46h 46h 0Dh
Blank acquisitionGET=BLANK47h 45h 54h 3Dh 42h 4Ch 41h 4Eh 4Bh 0Dh

Numerics

6-axis color adjust.... 104

A

Adjusting keystone distortion 68

Adjusting the volume.... 77

Air filter.... 199

Ambient light 102

Analog PC.... 53, 137, 138

Analog PC-1.... 137

ANALOG PC-1 / DVI-I input terminal.... 53, 137, 138

Analog PC-2.... 137, 138

ANALOG PC-2 / COMPONENT terminal.... 53, 137, 138

ASPECT......67

Aspect 66,287

AUDIO IN terminal 44, 137, 138, 141, 153

AUDIO OUT terminal ..... 44, 139, 142

Auto (Aspect) 66

AUTO PC 57

Auto PC.... 57

B

Beep.... 111

BLANK 76

Brightness 99

Broadcast Mode.... 249

C

Ceiling mounted.... 146

Classroom Mode.... 236

Component 53, 141

Connection to computer.... 137

Contrast 99

Corner adjustment 150

Customizing system operation...... 108

D

D. ZOOM....78

DHCP 174

Digital image shift 63

Digital PC ....53, 138

Digital zoom....40

Direct Mode....222

Direct power on 111

Display resolution (Preparing the computer) 55

Displaying logo....110

DVI 53,138

DVI-I 137, 138

DVI-I input terminal ....44

Dynamic gamma 103

E

Edge blending 159

Electronic zoom....149

F

Factory defaults....121

FREEZE 76

G

Gamma 100

Guide....154

H

HDMI 53, 139, 140

HDMI color space....92

HDMI IN terminal......44, 139, 140

HDMI input level....92

HDMI over scan 93

Horizontal pixels....91

Horizontal position....90

Horizontal-vertical keystone .....150

|

IMAGE 72

Image adjustment menu 84

Image flip H/V (Ceiling mounted / Rear projection).... 146

Image mode (Image quality) 71

Information.... 84, 122

INPUT 54

Input signal select 53

Input terminal 44

Connecting to AV equipment ..... 140

Connection to computer 137

K

Key lock 112

KEYSTONE 68

Keystone.... 68

L

Lamp counter...... 119

Lamp mode.... 107

Lamp replacement .... 119, 156, 201, 202

LAN port...... 44

Language.... 115

LED indicator 42, 280

M

Meeting Mode 226

Memory color correction 104

Menu 84

Menu display time 156

Menu position.... 154

Motion blur reduction 114

MUTE....77

Muting 77

N

Network function ......170, 171, 172

Network password setting .....170

Network setting initialization......175

Network settings....84

Network settings lock ....169

Networked Multi-Projection .....205

0

OK 41

Optical zoom ....57

P

Password settings ......116

Performing Gamma Correction .....100

PJLink 175

Positional lock 146

POWER....52,74

Power saver settings....73

Power-saving 73

Progressive 93

Projector on....110

R

Rear projection....146

Register network password......171

Register password....117

Remote control....34, 40, 113

Reset....107, 121

S

Screen aspect ......60, 148, 287

Screen color 153

Screen when blank....109

Selecting a language....115, 144

Setting display status ....87

Sharpness ....100

Side control 42

Signal type ......292

Index

Slideshows.... 94

Split-screen display.... 81

System settings menu.... 84

T

TCP/IP settings 174

Test pattern 158, 291

Total dots.... 89

Tracking 89

True size (Aspect).... 66

Turning on external monitor output (preparing the notebook computer) 145

U

USB....79

USB Port 44

V

Vertical pixels....91

Vertical position.... 90

VOL....77

W

WARNING indicator 43,280

Z

Zooming an image 78

- Lamp

Part No.: RS-LP08

• Ceiling attachment Part No.: RS-CL12 (WUX450/WX520)

- Ceiling attachment Part No.: RS-CL13 (WUX400ST/WX450ST)

- Ceiling-mount pipe (400 - 600 mm / 15.7 - 23.6 in) Part No.: RS-CL08*

- Ceiling-mount pipe (600 - 1000 mm / 23.6 - 39.4 in) Part No.: RS-CL09*

- Air filter

Part No.: RS-FL02

- Remote control Part No.: RS-RC06 RS-RC05

- Option feet Part No.: RS-FT01

Input Settings Menu

*: Factory defaults (setting after reset)

AspectDigital PC / Analog PC-1/2 / HDMI (when [HDMI In] is [Computer])P87
Auto*
16:10
16:9
4:3
True size
HDMI (when [HDMI In] is [Auto]) / Component
Auto*
16:9
4:3
Zoom
True size
USB / LAN
Auto
Auto PCP88
Input signal selectP88
640 x 480
:
1920 x 1200
Input signal settings2
Total dots P89
Tracking P89
Horizontal position P90
Vertical position P90
Horizontal pixels P91
Vertical pixels P91
HDMI input levelP92
Auto*
Normal
Expanded
HDMI color spaceHDMI P92
Auto*
RGB
YCbCr
HDMI over scan*1HDMI P93
Off
On
ProgressiveComponent / HDMIP93
Off
Film/auto*
Video 1
Video 2
25p/30p(PsF)

*1 Factory default settings are based on these conditions: [On] when HDMI ([HDMI In]) is [Auto], and [Off] when it is [Computer].

CANON XEED WX520 - Input Settings Menu - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Slideshow interval P94"] --> B["Split screen"]
    B --> C["Off*"]
    B --> D["On"]
    B --> E["Settings Split screen Off"]
    F["[--:--"]] --> G["Digital PC / Analog PC-1/2 / HDMI / Component"]
    H["60:00"] --> G
    I["Control rights Left screen"] --> G
    J["On"] --> G
    K["Right screen"] --> G

Image Adjustment Menu
CANON XEED WX520 - Input Settings Menu - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Image priority (in split-screen mode)"] --> B["Image mode P97"]
    B --> C["Create profile P98"]
    C --> D["Save profile (When profile is selected) P98"]
    C --> E["Baseline image mode (When profile is selected)"]
    E --> F["Brightness P99"]
    E --> G["Contrast P99"]
    E --> H["Sharpness"]
    E --> I["Gamma"]
    C --> J["Color adjustment"]
    J --> K["Color level"]
    J --> L["Color balance"]
    J --> M["Color temperature"]
    J --> N["R Gain"]
    J --> O["G Gain"]
    J --> P["B Gain"]
    J --> Q["R Offset"]
    J --> R["G Offset"]
    J --> S["B Offset"]

CANON XEED WX520 - Menu Configuration - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Advanced adjustment"] --> B["Ambient light (when Photo/sRGB is selected)"]
    B --> C{Noise reduction*2 Off P103}
    C --> D["Dynamic gamma*3 Off P103"]
    C --> E["Mem. color correct*4 Flesh Off P104"]
    E --> F["6-axis color adjust Off*"]
    F --> G["Fine-Tune Gamma"]
    G --> H["Lamp mode"]
    H --> I["Reset"]

    B --> J["Off*"]
    B --> K["Adjust"]
    K --> L["Type Tungsten"]
    L --> M["Fluorescent"]
    M --> N["Level L"]
    N --> O["H"]

    C --> P["Weak"]
    C --> Q["Middle"]
    C --> R["Strong"]

    E --> S["Weak"]
    E --> T["Middle"]
    E --> U["Strong"]

    F --> V["Sky Weak"]
    F --> W["Green Middle"]
    F --> X["Strong"]

    G --> Y["P104"]
    G --> Z["P105"]

    Y --> AA["Adjust"]
    Y --> AB["Reset"]
    AB --> AC["Hue / Saturation / Brightness"]

    Z --> AD["On"]

    AA --> AE["Off*"]
    AA --> AF["P106"]

    Z --> AG["Full power*"]
    Z --> AH["P107"]

    Z --> AI["Power saver"]

    Z --> AJ["OK / Cancel"]

Factory default settings are set according to the following conditions.

*2 • For HDMI (when [HDMI In] is [Auto]), the factory default is [Off].
- For Component, the factory default is [Weak].
*3 • For Analog PC-1/2, Digital PC or HDMI (when [HDMI In] is [Computer]), the factory default is [Off].
- [Weak] by default for Component or HDMI (when [HDMI In] is [Auto]).
*4 • [Off] by default for HDMI (when [HDMI In] is [Computer]), or for Digital PC, Analog PC (1 or 2), USB, or LAN.
- HDMI (when [HDMI In] is [Auto]) or COMPONENT: Weak

*: Factory defaults (setting after reset)

Install Settings Menu
CANON XEED WX520 - Menu Configuration - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Positional lock Off* P146"] --> B["Image flip H/V None* P146"]
    B --> C["Screen aspect 16:10* P148"]
    C --> D["Zoom (WUX400ST/WX450ST) P149"]
    D --> E["Keystone Horizontal-vertical keystone* P150"]
    E --> F["Digital image shift D.image shift adjustment P150"]
    F --> G["Professional settings"]
    G --> H["Micro-digital image shift Off* P151"]
    H --> I["Registration Off* P151"]
    I --> J["Fan mode Normal* P152"]
    J --> K["Vertical projection"]
    K --> L["Edge Blending"]
    L --> M["Audio in terminal select"]
    M --> N["HDMI"]
    N --> O["On"]
    O --> P["Ceiling mounted"]
    O --> Q["Rear, Ceiling mounted"]
    P --> R["16:9"]
    R --> S["4:3"]
    S --> T["16:9 D. image shift"]
    S --> U["4:3 D. image shift"]
    T --> V["Corner adjustment"]
    U --> W["Reset"]
    K --> X["Adjust"]
    K --> Y["Adjust"]
    K --> Z["High altitude"]
    K --> AA["Off* P152"]
    K --> AB["Upward"]
    K --> AC["Downward"]
    K --> AD["Off* Adjust"]
    AD --> AE["P159 Left"]
    AD --> AF["Right Top"]
    AD --> AG["Bottom Black level adjustment"]
    AD --> AH["Reset"]
    M --> AI["Off Audio in 1"]
    M --> AJ["Audio in 2"]
    M --> AK["HDMI* *: Factory defaults (setting after reset)"]

CANON XEED WX520 - Menu Configuration - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Digital PC Off P153"] --> B["Analog PC-1 Off P153"]
    B --> C["Analog PC-2 Off P153"]
    C --> D["Component Off P153"]
    D --> E["Screen color Normal* P153"]
    E --> F["On screen"]
    F --> G["Menu position P154"]
    G --> H["Guide Off P154"]
    H --> I["Show input status Off P155"]
    I --> J["Overheat warning display Off* P155"]
    J --> K["Menu display time Normal* P156"]
    K --> L["Lamp warning display Off P156"]
    L --> M["Air filter warning display Off P157"]
    M --> N["Split screen ID display"]
    N --> O["Test pattern"]

    A --> P["Audio in 1*"]
    A --> Q["Audio in 2"]
    B --> R["Audio in 1*"]
    B --> S["Audio in 2"]
    C --> T["Audio in 1"]
    C --> U["Audio in 2*"]
    D --> V["Audio in 1"]
    D --> W["Audio in 2*"]
    E --> X["Greenboard"]
    E --> Y["Adjust"]
    F --> Z["On*"]
    G --> AA["On*"]
    H --> AB["On*"]
    I --> AC["Extended"]
    J --> AD["On*"]
    K --> AE["On*"]
    L --> AF["Off P157"]
    L --> AG["On*"]
    M --> AH["Off P158"]
    M --> AI["On"]

*: Factory defaults (setting after reset)

System Settings Menu

CANON XEED WX520 - System Settings Menu - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["User screen settings"] --> B["Logo capture OK P108"]
    B --> C["Logo position Upper L P108"]
    C --> D["No signal screen Black P109"]
    D --> E["Screen when blank Black* P109"]
    E --> F["Projector on Skip P110"]
    F --> G["Auto power-off 5 min. P110"]
    G --> H["Direct power on Off* P111"]
    H --> I["Beep Off"]
    I --> J["Key repeat"]
    J --> K["Key lock"]
    K --> L["Remote control channel"]
    L --> M["Motion blur reduction"]

    B --> N["Cancel*"]
    C --> O["Upper R"]
    C --> P["Center*"]
    C --> Q["Lower L"]
    C --> R["Lower R"]

    D --> S["Blue*"]
    D --> T["User logo"]

    E --> U["Blue"]
    E --> V["User logo"]

    F --> W["Canon logo*"]
    F --> X["User logo"]

    G --> Y["10 min."]
    G --> Z["15 min.*"]
    G --> AA["20 min."]
    G --> AB["30 min."]
    G --> AC["60 min."]
    G --> AD["Disabled"]

    H --> AE["On"]

    I --> AF["On*"]

    J --> AG["Off"]
    J --> AH["On*"]

    K --> AI["Off*"]
    K --> AJ["Main unit"]
    K --> AK["Remote (wireless)"]

    L --> AL["Ch1 P113"]
    L --> AM["Ch2"]
    L --> AN["Ch3"]
    L --> AO["Ch4"]
    L --> AP["Independent*"]

    M --> AQ["Off*"]
    M --> AR["On"]

    AF --> AS["P112"]
    AG --> AT["P112"]
    AH --> AU["P112"]
    AI --> AV["P114"]
    AJ --> AW["P114"]
    AK --> AX["P114"]
    AL --> AY["P114"]
    AM --> AZ["P114"]
    AN --> BA["P114"]
    AO --> BB["P114"]
    AP --> BC["P114"]

    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#fcf,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style L fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style M fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style N fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style O fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style P fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style Q fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style R fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style S fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style T fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style U fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style V fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style W fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style X fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
HDMI In Auto* P115
Computer
Language English Turkish P115
German Polish
French Hungarian
Italian Czech
Spanish Danish
Portuguese Arabic
SwedishChinese (Simplified)
RussianChinese (Traditional)
Dutch Korean
Finnish Japanese
Norwegian

CANON XEED WX520 - Menu Configuration - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Other settings"] --> B["Password settings Off* P116"]
    B --> C["Register password"]
    C --> D["Gamma restore"]
    D --> E["Lamp counter"]
    E --> F["Air filter counter"]
    F --> G["Firmware"]
    G --> H["Factory defaults"]

    B --> I["On"]
    C --> J["Password input"]
    D --> K["Off* P118"]
    D --> L["Adjust"]
    E --> M["Return"]
    E --> N["Reset (Yes / No)"]
    F --> O["Return"]
    F --> P["Reset (Yes / No)"]

    G --> Q["P121"]
    H --> R["P121"]

    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

Network Settings Menu

CANON XEED WX520 - Network Settings Menu - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Network settings lock"] --> B["Network password setting"]
    B --> C["Register network password"]
    C --> D["Network function (wired)"]
    D --> E["Network standby settings"]
    E --> F["Detailed settings (wired)"]
    F --> G["IP address"]
    H["Unlock"] --> I["P169"]
    J["Lock*"] --> K["P170"]
    L["Off"] --> M["On*"]
    N["Password input"] --> O["P171"]
    P["Off*"] --> Q["P171"]
    R["On"] --> S["P172"]
    T["Normal"] --> U["P172"]
    V["Low-power*"] --> W["P172"]
    X["*: Factory defaults (setting after reset)"]

CANON XEED WX520 - Network Settings Menu - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Gateway address P173"] --> B["MAC address P173"]
    B --> C["DHCP Off* P174"]
    C --> D["TCP/IP settings IP address P174"]
    D --> E["Network setting initialization P175"]
    E --> F["IP address (wired) Shows the IP address"]
    F --> G["PJLink Off P175"]
    G --> H["AMX Device Discovery Off* P176"]
    H --> I["Crestron RoomView Off* P177"]
    I --> J["On"]
    J --> K["On*"]
    K --> L["On"]
    L --> M["On"]
    M --> N["On"]
    N --> O["On"]
    O --> P["On"]
    P --> Q["On"]
    Q --> R["On"]
    R --> S["On"]
    S --> T["On"]
    T --> U["On"]
    U --> V["On"]
    V --> W["On"]
    W --> X["On"]
    X --> Y["On"]
    Y --> Z["On"]
    Z --> AA["On"]
    AA --> AB["On"]
    AB --> AC["On"]
    AC --> AD["On"]
    AD --> AE["On"]
    AE --> AF["On"]
    AF --> AG["On"]
    AG --> AH["On"]
    AH --> AI["On"]
    AI --> AJ["On"]
    AJ --> AK["On"]
    AK --> AL["On"]
    AL --> AM["On"]
    AM --> AN["On"]
    AN --> AO["On"]
    AO --> AP["On"]
    AP --> AQ["On"]
    AQ --> AR["On"]
    AR --> AS["On"]
    AS --> AT["On"]
    AT --> AU["On"]
    AU --> AV["On"]
    AV --> AW["On"]
    AW --> AX["On"]
    AX --> AY["On"]
    AY --> AZ["On"]
    AZ --> BA["On"]
    BA --> BB["On"]
    BB --> BC["On"]
    BC --> BD["On"]
    BD --> BE["On"]
    BE --> BF["On"]
    BF --> BG["On"]
    BG --> BH["On"]
    BH --> BI["On"]
    BI --> BJ["On"]
    BJ --> BK["On"]
    BK --> BL["On"]
    BL --> BM["On"]
    BM --> BN["On"]
    BN --> BO["On"]
    BO --> BP["On"]
    BP --> BQ["On"]
    BQ --> BR["On"]
    BR --> BS["On"]
    BS --> BT["On"]
    BT --> BU["On"]
    BU --> BV["On"]
    BV --> BW["On"]

Information

Model name P122
Input signal
Firmware
Serial no.
E-mail sender address
E-mail recipient address
Projector name
Location
System information ID

*: Factory defaults (setting after reset)

CANON INC.

30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan

U.S.A.

CANON U.S.A. INC.

One Canon Park, Melville, New York 11747, U.S.A.

For all inquires concerning this product, call toll free in the U.S. 1-800-OK-CANON

CANADA

CANON CANADA INC. HEADQUARTERS

6390 Dixie Road, Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada

CANON CANADA INC. MONTREAL BRANCH

5990, Côte-de-Liesse, Montréal Québec H4T 1V7, Canada

CANON CANADA INC. CALGARY OFFICE

2828, 16th Street, N.E. Calgary, Alberta T2E 7K7, Canada

For all inquiries concerning this product, call toll free in Canada 1-800-OK-CANON

EUROPE, AFRICA & MIDDLE EAST

CANON EUROPE LTD.

3 The Square, Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET United Kingdom

CANON EUROPA N.V.

Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands

CANON FRANCE S.A.S

17, quai du President Paul Doumer, 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France

CANON UK LTD.

Woodhatch Reigate Surrey RH2 8BF, United Kingdom

15F Jinbao Building No.89 Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, China

CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD.

19 / F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong

CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.

1 HarbourFront Avenue, #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632

CANON KOREA CONSUMER IMAGING INC.

607, Teheran-ro, Gangnam-gu, Seoul, Rep. of KOREA

OCEANIA

CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.

Building A, The Park Estate, 5 Talavera Road, Macquarie Park, NSW 2113, Australia

Akoranga Business Park, Akoranga Drive, Northcote, Auckland, New Zealand

Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : CANON

Model : XEED WX520

Category : Video projector